Quantum Using Ecostruxure™ Control Expert: Ethernet Network Modules User Manual

Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
33002479 10/2019
Quantum using
EcoStruxure™
Control Expert
Ethernet Network Modules
User Manual
Original instructions
10/2019
33002479.20
www.schneider-electric.com
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. If you
have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication,
please notify us.
You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use, all or part of
this document on any medium whatsoever without permission of Schneider Electric, given in
writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext links to this document or its content.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of
the document or its content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at
your own risk. All other rights are reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and
using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system
data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant
instructions must be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may
result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2019 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
2 33002479 10/2019
Table of Contents
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Part I Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.1 Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
140 CPU 651 x0 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Physical Presentation and Mounting of Standard High End Modules . 22
CPU Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the CPU LCD Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.2 Module Description 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 . . . . . . . 41
Modicon Quantum Ethernet Modules Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Indicators for Ethernet Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Connectors and Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet Module in a Quantum Safety
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.3 Installing the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cable Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mounting the Module in the Quantum PLC Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Establishing the FTP Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Establishing HTTP and Write Passwords for NOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.4 Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Customer Support Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Chapter 2 Ethernet Communication Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Services . . . . . . . . . 74
Address Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Modbus Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
33002479 10/2019 3
I/O Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Global Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Time Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Electronic Mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Bandwidth Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
FTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Embedded Web Pages (HTTP Server, Web Configuration and
Diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Additional Ethernet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Part II Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet
Modules Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Chapter 3 Start Communication with Control Expert. . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.1 How to Configure the Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Add a New Network to the Communication Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configure Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Properties of a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Delete an Existing Network Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.2 Control Expert Communication Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Communication Configuration Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Link between Configuration and Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Link between Data and Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.3 Selecting the Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Selecting the Quantum NOE Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Security (Enable / Disable HTTP, FTP, and TFTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Quantum NOE Ethernet Messaging Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.4 Selecting the Ethernet Coprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Selecting the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuring the IP Address of the Ethernet Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Controller Messaging
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4 33002479 10/2019
Part III Using the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert
Ethernet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Chapter 4 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks . . . . . . 119
4.1 IEC Data Transfer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
CREAD_REG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
CWRITE_REG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
READ_REG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
WRITE_REG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
TCP_IP_ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.2 MBP_MSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Operational Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Network Control Block Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Modbus Plus, SY/MAX, and Ethernet TCP/IP Error Codes. . . . . . . . . 143
CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
SY/MAX-Specific Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Read Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Write Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Get Local Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Clear Local Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Get Remote Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clear Remote Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
TCP/IP Ethernet Network Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Reset Optional Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Read CTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Write CTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Send Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Send Modbus Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Close Connection Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Change Modbus Plus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Read/Write Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Enable / Disable HTTP or FTP/TFTP Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
33002479 10/2019 5
Chapter 5 Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Planning the Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) System . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Multicast Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Quantum NOE Global Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Configuration of Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) by the Web for NOE
771 x1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Chapter 6 I/O Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
I/O Scanner Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configuring the Quantum I/O Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
I/O Scanning Contextual Menu for Copy/Cut/Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
I/O Scanning with Multiple Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Introduction to Configuring Advantys from Control Expert . . . . . . . . . . 214
Introduction to Configuring the PRM Master DTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Introduction to Configuring a BMX PRA 0100 from Control Expert . . . 220
Property Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Saving an Advantys Configuration in an Control Application . . . . . . . . 230
Managed Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
I/O Scanner Response Times: Remote Input to Remote Output . . . . . 233
Chapter 7 Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement 237
Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 238
Understanding Fast Device Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Configuring Fast Device Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Chapter 8 Network Management Service (SNMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ASN.1 Naming Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configuring an NOE with SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Configuring an NOE with TFE Private MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Chapter 9 NTP Time Synchronization Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Introducing the NTP Time Synchronization Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Using the R_NTPC Block for Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
NTP Time Synchronization Service Operating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . 269
Configuring the NTP Time Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Chapter 10 Electronic Mail Notification Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Introducing the Electronic Mail Notification Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Mail Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Using the MBP_MSTR Block for Mail Service Communication . . . . . . 279
Mail Service Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Electronic Mail Notification Service Subtree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
6 33002479 10/2019
Chapter 11 Embedded Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Quantum Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Monitoring Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Diagnostics Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Setup Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Accessing the Web Utility Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Configured Local Rack Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Controller Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CPU Configuration Screen: Data Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Remote I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Quantum PLC Data Monitor Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Utility Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Configure Address Server Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Configuring the Time Synchronization Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Mail Service Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Ethernet Module Diagnostic Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
NTP Diagnostics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Properties Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Contacting Schneider Electric Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chapter 12 Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Quantum Hot Standby for Control Expert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Hot Standby Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
NOE Module Configuration and Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 IP Address Assignment . . . . . . . 330
140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 Operating Modes in Quantum Hot
Standby System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
NOE IP Address Swap Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Network Effects of Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Control Expert
Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Appendices ......................................... 341
Appendix A Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Responding to Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Reading and Clearing the Crash Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Downloading a New NOE Exec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Downloading a New NOE Exec via FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Downloading a New NOE Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Appendix B Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
33002479 10/2019 7
Appendix C Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus Application Protocol . 357
Modbus Application Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Modbus Application Protocol PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Modbus Application Protocol Service Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Modbus Application Protocol PDU Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
TCP/IP Specific Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Closing a TCP Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Appendix D Installation and Configuration of a Modicon Quantum
Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Configuring the Rack with Control Expert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Configuring the Ethernet Network with Control Expert. . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Configuring the I/O Scanning Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Building and Downloading the Configuration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Diagnosing the Ethernet Module Using the Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
8 33002479 10/2019
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device
before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear
throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention
to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
33002479 10/2019 9
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation
of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid
the hazards involved.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Do not use this product on machinery lacking effective point-of-operation guarding. Lack of
effective point-of-operation guarding on a machine can result in serious injury to the operator of
that machine.
WARNING
UNGUARDED EQUIPMENT
 Do not use this software and related automation equipment on equipment which does not have
point-of-operation protection.
 Do not reach into machinery during operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
This automation equipment and related software is used to control a variety of industrial processes.
The type or model of automation equipment suitable for each application will vary depending on
factors such as the control function required, degree of protection required, production methods,
unusual conditions, government regulations, etc. In some applications, more than one processor
may be required, as when backup redundancy is needed.
Only you, the user, machine builder or system integrator can be aware of all the conditions and
factors present during setup, operation, and maintenance of the machine and, therefore, can
determine the automation equipment and the related safeties and interlocks which can be properly
used. When selecting automation and control equipment and related software for a particular
application, you should refer to the applicable local and national standards and regulations. The
National Safety Council's Accident Prevention Manual (nationally recognized in the United States
of America) also provides much useful information.
In some applications, such as packaging machinery, additional operator protection such as point-
of-operation guarding must be provided. This is necessary if the operator's hands and other parts
of the body are free to enter the pinch points or other hazardous areas and serious injury can occur.
Software products alone cannot protect an operator from injury. For this reason the software
cannot be substituted for or take the place of point-of-operation protection.
Ensure that appropriate safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks related to point-of-operation
protection have been installed and are operational before placing the equipment into service. All
interlocks and safeties related to point-of-operation protection must be coordinated with the related
automation equipment and software programming.
10 33002479 10/2019
NOTE: Coordination of safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks for point-of-operation
protection is outside the scope of the Function Block Library, System User Guide, or other
implementation referenced in this documentation.
START-UP AND TEST

Before using electrical control and automation equipment for regular operation after installation,
the system should be given a start-up test by qualified personnel to verify correct operation of the
equipment. It is important that arrangements for such a check be made and that enough time is
allowed to perform complete and satisfactory testing.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
 Verify that all installation and set up procedures have been completed.
 Before operational tests are performed, remove all blocks or other temporary holding means
used for shipment from all component devices.
 Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
Follow all start-up tests recommended in the equipment documentation. Store all equipment
documentation for future references.
Software testing must be done in both simulated and real environments.
Verify that the completed system is free from all short circuits and temporary grounds that are not
installed according to local regulations (according to the National Electrical Code in the U.S.A, for
instance). If high-potential voltage testing is necessary, follow recommendations in equipment
documentation to prevent accidental equipment damage.
Before energizing equipment:
 Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
 Close the equipment enclosure door.
 Remove all temporary grounds from incoming power lines.
 Perform all start-up tests recommended by the manufacturer.
33002479 10/2019 11
OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
The following precautions are from the NEMA Standards Publication ICS 7.1-1995 (English
version prevails):
 Regardless of the care exercised in the design and manufacture of equipment or in the selection
and ratings of components, there are hazards that can be encountered if such equipment is
improperly operated.
 It is sometimes possible to misadjust the equipment and thus produce unsatisfactory or unsafe
operation. Always use the manufacturer’s instructions as a guide for functional adjustments.
Personnel who have access to these adjustments should be familiar with the equipment
manufacturer’s instructions and the machinery used with the electrical equipment.
 Only those operational adjustments actually required by the operator should be accessible to
the operator. Access to other controls should be restricted to prevent unauthorized changes in
operating characteristics.
12 33002479 10/2019
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This document is for users who want their Quantum PLC to communicate with devices over an
Ethernet network. It assumes that you have some knowledge of PLC systems and a working
knowledge of Modsoft, Concept, ProWORX, or Control Expert programming tools. You also need
to understand the use of Ethernet networks and TCP/IP.
This document describes the functionality of the Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules, the
104 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 modules, and the Ethernet port of the 140 CPU 651 x0
modules.
Model Number Module Type

140 NOE 771 00 Ethernet option adapter
140 NOE 771 01 Ethernet option adapter
140 NOE 771 10 FactoryCast Ethernet option adapter
140 NOE 771 11 FactoryCast Ethernet option adapter
140 NWM 100 00 FactoryCast HMI option adapter
140 CPU 651 50 CPU with embedded Ethernet port
140 CPU 651 60 CPU with embedded Ethernet port
This document describes how to install, set up, and use Ethernet-enabled modules in a Modicon
Quantum control system. These modules allow the Quantum system to communicate with devices
over an Ethernet network. Topics addressed in this manual include:
 the hardware architecture of a Modicon Quantum Ethernet module, which is designed to fit into
a single slot on the standard Modicon Quantum backplane
 capabilities and installation of 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 modules in a Modicon
Quantum system
 capabilities of the Ethernet port on the 140 CPU 651 x0 CPU modules
33002479 10/2019 13
This document describes the procedures for:
 setting up the modules to transfer data using either the Global Data modules (140 NOE 771 01,
140 NOE 771 11, or 140 CPU 651 x0 mobules) or the I/O scanner utility (in the
140 NOE 771 00/01/11 modules and the 140 CPU 651 50/60 modules)
 using an embedded Web server to access diagnostics and online configurations for the module
and its associated controller
 using the FactoryCast Web server to customize your configuration via embedded Web pages
(in 140 NOE 771 10/11 and 140 NWM 100 00 modules)
 using an NOE module in a Hot Standby solution for fault-tolerant remote I/O and
communications
Nomenclature
The following table describes the naming rules for various groups of modules:
The Name ... Refers to the ...

140 NOE 771 xx 140 NOE 771 00, 140 NOE 771 01, 140 NOE 771 10 and 140 NOE 771 11
modules
140 NOE 771 x0 140 NOE 771 00 and 140 NOE 771 10 modules
140 NOE 771 x1 140 NOE 771 01 and 140 NOE 771 11 modules
140 NOE 771 0x 140 NOE 771 00 and 140 NOE 771 01 modules
140 NOE 771 1x 140 NOE 771 10 and 140 NOE 771 11 modules
140 CPU 651 x0 140 CPU 651 50 and 140 CPU 651 60 modules
NOTE: Before adding a node to an existing corporate network, consult with your information
technology (IT) department about any possible consequences.
14 33002479 10/2019
Validity Note
This document is valid for EcoStruxure™ Control Expert 14.1 or later.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in the present document also appear online.
To access the information online:
Step Action
1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com.
2 In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
 Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
 To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks (*).
3 If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the
reference that interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click
on the product range that interests you.
4 If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that
interests you.
5 Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the datasheet.
6 To save or print a datasheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.
The characteristics that are presented in the present document should be the same as those
characteristics that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise
content over time to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the document
and online information, use the online information as your reference.
Related Documents
Title of Documentation Reference Number

Control Panel Technical Guide, How to protect a machine from malfunctions CPTG003_EN (English),
due to electromagnetic disturbance CPTG003_FR (French)
Electrical installation guide EIGED306001EN (English)
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, TCP/IP Configuration, User 33002467 (English),
Manual 33002468 (French),
33002469 (German),
31008078 (Italian),
33002470 (Spanish),
31007110 (Chinese)
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware Reference Manual 35010529 (English),
35010530 (French),
35010531 (German),
35013975 (Italian),
35010532 (Spanish),
35012184 (Chinese)
33002479 10/2019 15
Title of Documentation Reference Number
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Discrete and Analog I/O, 35010516 (English),
Reference Manual 35010517 (French),
35010518 (German),
35013970 (Italian),
35010519 (Spanish),
35012185 (Chinese)
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Experts and Communication, 35010574 (English),
Reference Manual 35010575 (French),
35010576 (German),
35014012 (Italian),
35010577 (Spanish),
35012187 (Chinese)
Communication Services and Architectures, Reference Manual 35010500 (English),
35010501 (French),
35006176 (German),
35013966 (Italian),
35006177 (Spanish),
35012196 (Chinese)
Schneider Automation BOOTP Lite Ethernet IP Address Download Utility for 31002087
Schneider Automation Ethernet Products Instruction Sheet
FactoryCast for Quantum, Premium and Micro User Guide 31001229
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hot Standby System, User 35010533 (English),
Manual 35010534 (French),
35010535 (German),
35013993 (Italian),
35010536 (Spanish),
35012188 (Chinese)
Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300
Open Modbus Specification http://www.modbus.org/
FactoryCast HMI 1.7, Setup Manual, Premium and Quantum HMI Modules 35007632 (English),
35007634 (French),
35007633 (German),
35007635 (Spanish),
35007636 (Italian)
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website
at https://www.schneider-electric.com/en/download
16 33002479 10/2019
Ethernet Products
33002479 10/2019
Part I
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Products
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Products
Purpose
This part introduces the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert products used for Ethernet
communication.
What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
1 Product Description 19
2 Ethernet Communication Services 73
33002479 10/2019 17
Ethernet Products
18 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 1
Product Description
Product Description
Overview
This chapter includes product overviews for:
 the 140 NOE 771 xx modules
 the 140 NWM 100 00 module
 the built-in Ethernet port of the 140 CPU 651 x0 modules
When inserted in the backplane, these modules allow your Quantum PLC to communicate over
Ethernet networks.
What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
1.1 Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0 20
1.2 Module Description 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 41
1.3 Installing the Module 51
1.4 Customer Support 70
33002479 10/2019 19
Product Description
Section 1.1
Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0
Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0
Overview
This is a discussion of the the Modicon Quantum High-End CPU (HE CPU) (140 CPU 651 x0).
What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
140 CPU 651 x0 Product Overview 21
Physical Presentation and Mounting of Standard High End Modules 22
CPU Controls and Displays 24
Indicators 28
Using the CPU LCD Display Screens 30
20 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
140 CPU 651 x0 Product Overview
General Description
The Quantum-140 CPU 651 x0 module (see page 22) is among the newest in a series of Quantum
processor modules. It combines standard PLC functions with the diagnostic possibilities of a Web
server. The 140 CPU 651 x0 communicates using an RJ45 connection.
The 140 CPU 651 x0 module is in a double-width standard Quantum housing, which requires 2
sequential slots in a Quantum rack. Its server functions are diagnostic only, so use software to
configure services.
The table shows the key Ethernet services that are implemented:
Service 140 CPU 651 x0

HTTP Server (see page 88) x
FTP Server (see page 87) x
Flash File System (see page 90) x
BOOTP Client (see page 69) x
Address Server (see page 76) x
SNMP V2 Agent (Network Management Service) (see page 78) x
Modbus Messaging (see page 79) x
I/O Scanner (see page 81) x
Hot Standby
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) (see page 83) x
Bandwidth Monitoring (see page 86) x
Fast Device Replacement (Server) (see page 237) x
Enhanced Web Diagnosis (see page 88) x
Schneider Private MIB (see page 78) x
FactoryCast Application (see page 90)
User-programmed Web pages
RJ45 Connection, see Modbus port in the Quantum Platform manual. x
Fiber Optic Connection
Time Synchronization Service (see page 84)
Electronic Mail Notification Service (see page 85) X
33002479 10/2019 21
Product Description
Physical Presentation and Mounting of Standard High End Modules
Illustration
The figure shows a standard High End module and its components.
1 model number, module description, color code

2 lens cover (open)
3 LCD display (here covered by the lens cover)
4 key switch
5 keypad (with 2 red LED indicators)
6 modbus port (RS-232) (RS-485)
7 USB port
8 Modbus Plus port
9 PCMCIA slot A (depends on CPU reference)
10 PCMCIA slot B
11 LED indicators (yellow) for Ethernet communication
12 Ethernet port
13 battery (user installed)
14 reset button
15 2 screws
NOTE: Quantum High End processors are equipped with one PCMCIA slot (B) or two PCMCIA
slots (A and B) in which to install Schneider PCMCIA cards (other cards are not accepted).
22 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Mounting
Mounting the module onto the central back plane:
1 Hang the module.

2 Screw the module to the back plane.
33002479 10/2019 23
Product Description
CPU Controls and Displays
Lens Cover
The protective lens cover (2 on the CPU front panel (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Hot Standby System, User Manual)) can be opened by sliding it upwards.
With the lens cover open you have access to the following items:
 key switch
 battery
 reset button
Key Switch
The key switch (4) is a security feature and a memory protection switch. The key switch has two
positions: locked and unlocked. The key switch is only read and deciphered by the PLC OS portion
of the firmware and not by the OS loader portion.
The Quantum processors have a set of system menus that enable the operator to:
 perform PLC operations (i.e., start PLC, stop PLC)
 display module parameters (i.e., communications parameters)
 switch to the maintenance mode (in Safety processors)
The key positions are shown in the table below:
Key Position PLC Operation

unlocked:  System menu operations can be invoked and module parameters can be
modified by the operator with the LCD and keypad.
 Memory protection is OFF.
 You can switch to Maintenance mode (in Safety processors).
locked:  No system menu operations can be invoked and module parameters are
read-only.
 Memory protection is ON.
 Safe mode forced (in Safety processors).
Switching the key switch position from locked to unlocked or vice versa turns on the LCD's
backlight.
NOTE: For more explanations about Maintenance and Safe modes, refer to the Modicon Quantum,
Quantum Safety PLC, Safety Reference Manual.
24 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Key Switch Description Tables

The following table provides information on switch position for high end Quantum 140 CPU 6•• •••
with firmware < 3.12:
Operation Switch Position

Unlocked Locked
Programming mode Allowed Allowed
Monitoring mode Allowed Allowed
Upload application Allowed Allowed
Download, online modification Allowed Forbidden
Stop/Run/Init commands from Control Expert Allowed Allowed
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
with firmware ≥ 3.12 and Unity Pro < V8:

Unlocked Locked
Programming mode Allowed Forbidden
Monitoring mode Allowed Allowed
Upload application Allowed Forbidden
Download, online modification Allowed Forbidden
Stop/Run/Init commands from Unity Pro Allowed Forbidden
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
with firmware ≥ 3.2 and Unity Pro ≥ V8:

Unlocked Locked
Programming mode Allowed (1) Forbidden
Monitoring mode Allowed(1) Allowed(1)
Upload application Allowed(1) Forbidden
Download, online modification Allowed(1) Forbidden
Stop/Run/Init commands from Control Allowed(1) Forbidden

Expert/UnityPro
(1)
: Password-protected if a password has been defined in the Control Expert/Unity Pro application
33002479 10/2019 25
Product Description
Reset Button
Pressing the reset button (12) forces a cold start of the PLC.
LCD Display
The liquid crystal display (LCD - 3) has 2 lines with 16 characters each with changeable backlight
state and contrast:
The backlight handling is entirely automated to save the life of the LCDs. The backlight turns on
when one of the following occurs:
 a key is pressed
 the key switch state is changed
 an error message is displayed on the LCD
The backlight stays on for error messages as long as the error message is displayed otherwise,
the backlight automatically turns off after five minutes.
Adjusting the Contrast

The contrast is adjustable from the keypad when the default screen is displayed:
Step Action
1 Press the MOD key:
2 To adjust the contrast darker press:
3 To adjust the contrast lighter press:
4 To confirm the setting press:
26 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Keypad
The keypad (5) has five keys that are mapped to hardware addresses. Each of the two arrow keys
includes an LED:
1 5 keys
2 2 LEDs
Using the Keys

Keypad functions:
Key Function
To cancel an entry, suspend or stop an action in progress
To display the preceding screens successively (move up the menu tree)
To confirm a selection or an entry
To set a field on the display into the modify mode
LED: on Key active:

 to scroll through menu options
 to scroll through modify mode field options
LED: flashing Key active: The modify mode field can be scrolled.
LED: off Key inactive: No menu options and no field options.
LED on Key active:
 to move around in a screen, field to field
 to go to the sub-menu
LED flashing Key active: Used to move digit to digit in a modify mode
field.
LED off Key inactive, there is no:
 sub-menu for menu option
 scrolling around a screen
 scrolling around a field
33002479 10/2019 27
Product Description
Indicators
Overview
The High End processors use two types of indicators:
1. LCD display: The Default Screen (see page 31) serves as a Controller status screen.
2. LED Indicators: The functionality of the LEDs is described in a table after the figure.
The following figure shows the two types of indicators.
1 LCD Display (lens cover closed)

2 LED Indicators
28 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
LED Description
The following table shows the description for the LED indicators of the different High End CPU
modules.
LEDs Indication
Standard Processors 140 CPU 65• •0 / Hot StandBy Processors 140 CPU 67• 6• /
140 CPU 651 60S 140 CPU 671 60S
COM Controlled by the Coprocessor hardware Controlled by the Coprocessor hardware
(yellow)  Indicates Ethernet activity  Indicates Primary or Standby activity
STS Controlled by the Coprocessor software Controlled by the Coprocessor firmware

(yellow)  Blinking: system is redundant and data
ON Normal
are exchanged from the Primary to
OFF Copro auto tests Standby controller
unsuccessful. Possible  ON: system not redundant / Copro
hardware problem. booting from power-on to end of self-
Flashing: tests
 OFF: Copro auto tests were not
1 Flash Configuration in
progress. successfull
Temporary situation.
2 Flashes Invalid MAC address
3 Flashes Link not connected
4 Flashes Duplicate IP Address.
Module is set to its
default IP address.
5 Flashes Waiting for IP address
from address server
6 Flashes Invalid IP address.
Module is set to its
default IP address.
7 Flashes Firmware incompatibility
between PLC OS and
Copro firmware
33002479 10/2019 29
Product Description
Using the CPU LCD Display Screens
Introduction
The controller LCD displays messages. These messages indicate the controller status. There are
four levels of menus and submenus. Use the keypad (see page 27) on the front of the controller to
access the menus.
For detailed information about the menus and submenus see:
 PLC Operations Menus and Submenus (see page 33)
 Using the Communications Menus and Submenus (see page 36)
 Using the LCD Settings Menus and Submenus (see page 39)
 Using the System Info Menus and Submenus (see page 40)
Structure: LCD display menus and submenus:
1 default screen
2 system menus
3 sub menus
4 sub screens
30 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Accessing the Screens

Use the keys on the keypad to access the system menus and submenus:
Step Action
1 To access the screens, confirm that the key switch is in the unlocked position.
2 To step down to a lower menu, operate one of the following keys:
3 To return to the previous menu, press:
140 CPU 65• •• Default Screen

The default screen is read-only and contains the following fields:
The default screen displays the following information:
Field Display Description

0 CPU mode M maintenance mode (only on safety processors)
S safe mode (only on safety processors)
2 CPU state RUN Application program is running.
STOP Application program is NOT running.
STOP offline
No Conf Processor has no application program.
Halt detected state error (in maintenance mode for safety
modules)
33002479 10/2019 31
Product Description
Field Display Description

BatL Indicates battery health:
 steady = Battery is low.
 no message = Battery is OK.
Port USB Indicates that the port has activity.

Modbus Plus MB+ Indicates Modbus Plus activity.
mb+ no activity
Dup duplicate MB+ address
ERR detected Modbus communications error
INI initial network search
Modbus 232 serial port activity for RS-232
485 serial port activity for RS-485
PCM 1 Displayed status indicates battery health of the PCMCIA
card in slot 1:
 steady = Battery is OK.
 flashing = Battery is low (only for green PCMCIAs
(version <04)) (1).
2 Displayed status indicates battery health of the PCMCIA
card in slot 2:
 steady = Battery is OK.
 flashing = Battery is low (only for green PCMCIAs
(version < 04)) (1).
(1) With blue PCMCIAs (version >= 04), when main battery is low, there is
no flash.
32 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
PLC Operations Menu

The structure of the PLC Operations menu and submenus are:
33002479 10/2019 33
Product Description
Submenu for PLC Operations: Start, Stop and Init:
Start, Stop, Init Fields Available Description

Screens Display
Start PLC Press <ENTER> to confirm Start. Pressing <ENTER> starts the controller.
Stop PLC Press <ENTER> to confirm Stop. Pressing <ENTER> stops the controller.
Init PLC Press <ENTER> to confirm Init. Pressing <ENTER> initializes the controller.
On safety processors, this command is only available in the
maintenance mode.
Submenu for PLC Operations Hot Standby CPU:
Screen Field Option Description

Hot Standby State PRIMARY CPU Controller serves as primary unit.
State: read-only STANDBY CPU Controller serves as standby unit.
Offline Controller is neither primary nor standby unit.
Hot Standby Mode RUN STS steady Controller is active and is either serving as primary PLC
Mode: (modifiable only or able to take over the primary PLC role if needed.
if the key switch
STS Controller is transferring/updating. When the transfer is
is in the flashing done, RUN stays on steady.
unlocked
position) OFFLINE STS steady Controller is taken out of service without stopping it or
disconnecting it from power.
If the controller is the primary PLC when the mode is
changed to offline, control switches to the standby PLC.
If the standby PLC changes to offline, the primary PLC
continues to operate without a backup.
STS Controller is transferring/updating.When the transfer is
flashing done, OFFLINE stays on steady.
Hot Standby A or B FIRST Hot Standby power order
Order: (modifiable only SECOND NOTE: To change the A/B order, confirm that the PLC
if the key switch
is in STOP mode.
is in the
unlocked
position)
34 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Screen Field Option Description

Hot Standby - Pressing the <ENTER> key confirms the transfer. The
Transfer: (This menu option is enabled only when the transfer initiates the request of a program update from
key switch is in the unlocked position.) the primary PLC. Pressing any other key cancels the
transfer initiation and returns to the Hot Standby
Transfer menu option screen.
NOTE: Transfer by keypad is based on %SW60.5
(see Unity Pro, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual ) use: modifying %SW60.5 by
application and requiring simultaneously a transfer by
Keypad, could lead to some issues (no transfer or
transfer retry).
Hot Standby The order of diagnostic screen varies with the operation.
Diag:
Halt user task in halt mode
RIO fails detected error reported by RIO head
HSBY fails detected error reported by optical link
Stop stop command sent
Off keypad offline command entered on keypad
Off %SW60 offline command set in command register
Off appli offline due to application mismatch
Off vers offline due to PLC or co-processor OS mismatch
Off RIO offline due to detectedRIO error
Take over standby CPU switched to primary CPU mode
Run run command sent
Plug & Run sun-link operational and standby CPU started
Power up no message: PLC just started
33002479 10/2019 35
Product Description
Communications Menu
Communications menu and submenus:
36 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Submenu for TCP/IP Ethernet PLC Communications submenus:
TCP/IP Ethernet Screen Fields Available Options Available Description

Displays
TCP/IP Ethernet IP ###.###.###.### decimal numbers Displays IP address.
Address1,2
TCP/IP Ethernet Subnet ###.###.###.### decimal numbers Displays subnetwork
Mask1,2 mask address.
TCP/IP Ethernet IP ###.###.###.### decimal numbers Displays Ethernet IP
Gateway1,2 gateway address.
TCP/IP Ethernet MAC ##.##.##.##.##.## hexadecimal Displays MAC address.
Address (read-only) numbers
1)Parameters
can be modified only if no applications have been downloaded (in NO CONF state).
2)When
a new PLC application has been downloaded, the Ethernet address on the screen is
updated only after accessing the highest level of the menu structure.
Modbus Plus PLC Communications submenus:
Fields Available Options Available Description

## 1-64 Enter a valid Modbus Plus
(modifiable only if the key switch is in the address.
unlocked position)
Modbus Plus State Monitor Link Modbus Plus state
Normal Link
Sole Station
Duplicate Address
No Token
33002479 10/2019 37
Product Description
Serial PLC Communications submenus:
Fields Available* Options Available Description

Mode 232 RS mode
485
Protocol ASCII protocols available
RTU
Adr 1 - 247 unit address
for Modbus Switchover
Primary CPU 1-119
Standby CPU 129 - 247
Rate 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, baud rate
2400, 3600. 4800, 7200, 9600, 19200 bits/s
Par NONE parity
ODD
EVEN
DB 7,8 data bits: If protocol is Modbus,
then RTU-8 or ASCII-7.
SB 1,2 stop bits
*If the key switch is in the unlocked position, fields are modifiable.
38 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
System Info Menu

Structure of System Info menus and submenus:
System Info, PLC Communications submenus:
System Info Screen Fields Available* Option Available Description

Displays
Stop Code #### machine stop code
Description description of the machine stop code
Firmware Info Rev.Ldr: ##.## OS revision
OS: ##.##-##-## OSLoader revision
Hardware Info HW Rev: #### hardware revision
Copro Info ##-IE-## co-processor revision
*Fields are read-only.
33002479 10/2019 39
Product Description
LCD Settings Menu

LCD Settings menus and submenus:
LCD Contrast settings submenu:
LCD Screen Contrast Fields Available Description

Screen Displays
LCD Contrast: #### Use the arrow keys to adjust the setting:
 Up arrow increases percent (brighter).
 Right arrow decreases percent (darker).
LCD Light setting submenus:
Screen Displays Fields Available Description

LCD Light: On LCD remains on permanently or until changed.
Off LCD remains off permanently or until changed.
1 Min LCD remains on for 1 minute.
5 Min LCD remains on for 5 minutes.
40 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Section 1.2
Module Description 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00
Module Description 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00
Overview
This section contains the module descriptions for 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00.

Topic Page
Modicon Quantum Ethernet Modules Overview 42
Indicators for Ethernet Modules 46
Connectors and Cabling 48
Using the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet Module in a Quantum Safety Project 49
33002479 10/2019 41
Product Description
Modicon Quantum Ethernet Modules Overview
Overview
The following information provides overviews of all Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules.
General Description
The Modicon Quantum Ethernet module, shown below, is one of the latest models in a line of
Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules designed to make it possible for a Modicon Quantum
PLC to communicate with devices over an Ethernet network. The electronics for the Ethernet
modules are contained in a standard Modicon Quantum single-width case that takes up one slot in
a Modicon Quantum backplane. The module, which is capable of being hot swapped, can be
plugged into any available slot in the backplane.
The NOE 771 x0 and NOE 771 x1 modules provide real-time peer-to-peer communications and
I/O scanning and a Modbus/TCP server. The included HTTP services provide maintenance and
configuration utilities to the module.
42 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Front View
The following figure shows the front of the NOE 771 00 Ethernet module as an example for all
Ethernet modules.
1 model number, module description, color code

2 LED display
3 IP Address writable area
4 Global address label
5 100 BASE-FX MT-RJ cable connector
6 10/100 BASE-T RJ45 cable connector
7 removable door
33002479 10/2019 43
Product Description
Key Ethernet Services

The key Ethernet services of the 140 NOE 771 (-00, -01, -10, -11) and 140 NWM 100 00 models
are listed below:
Service -00 -01 -10 -11 NWM

HTTP Server (see page 88) X X X X X
FTP Server (see page 87) X X X X X
Flash File System (see page 90) X X X X X
BOOTP Client (see page 69) X X X X X
Address Server (see page 76) X X X X
SNMP V2 Agent (Network Management Service) X X X X X
(see page 78)
Modbus Messaging (see page 79) X X X X X
I/O Scanner (see page 81) X X X
Hot Standby X X
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) (see page 83) X X
Bandwidth Monitoring (see page 86) X X
Fast Device Replacement (Server) (see page 237) X X
Enhanced Web Diagnosis (see page 88) X X X
Schneider Private MIB (see page 78) X X X
FactoryCast Application (see page 90) X X X
User-programmed Web pages X X X
JAVA Virtual Machine X
Fiber optic connection X X X X
RJ45 connection X X X X
Time Synchronization Service (see page 84) X
Electronic Mail Notification Service (see page 85) X X
NOTE: In the detailed description of the key features, only modules in the NOE family are named.
The features are also available for the 140 NWM 100 00 module, depending on the listed
properties in the above table.
NOTE: In Control Expert software, the 140 NWM 100 00 module is set in the TCP/IP Regular
Network family, although it belongs to the TCP/IP FactoryCast network family. So, the services
listed above (I/O scanning, Global Data, address server, Bandwidth monitoring) are not supported
by the module. However, they can be selected in the TCP/IP regular network configuration in
Control Expert. (Even if they are configured, those services won't work with the module.)
44 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Maximum Number of Networks Per CPU

The following table summarizes the maximum number of networks per CPU, where "networks"
means the sum of NOE, Modbus+ and any other communication modules:
Modicon Quantum CPU Type Supported Number of Networks

140 CPU 311 10 2
140 CPU 434 12A 6
140 CPU 534 14A 6
140 CPU 651 50 6
140 CPU 651 50 6
140 CPU 652 60 6
140 CPU 658 60 6
140 CPU 670 60 3
140 CPU 671 60 6
140 CPU 672 60 6
140 CPU 672 61 6
140 CPU 678 61 6
Front Panel Components

The front panel of the Ethernet modules contains identification markings, color codes, and LED
displays. A writable area for an IP address, a global address label, and two Ethernet cable
connectors is located behind the removable front panel door.
The following table provides a description of the front panel components that are shown in following
figure:
Component Description
LED Indicator Panel Indicates the operating status of the module, and the fiber optic
(see page 46) or Ethernet communications network to which it is connected.
IP Address Area Provides a writable area to record the module’s assigned IP
address.
Global Address Label Indicates the module’s global Ethernet MAC address assigned
at the factory.
100 BASE-FX Connector Provides an MT-RJ socket for connection to a 100-megabit
fiber-optic Ethernet cable.
10/100 BASE-T Connector Provides an RJ45 socket for connection to a shielded, twisted
pair Ethernet cable.
33002479 10/2019 45
Product Description
Indicators for Ethernet Modules
Illustration
The following figure shows the NOE 771 00 LED indicators as a placeholder for all other Ethernet
modules:
Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions:
LED Color Description

Active Green Indicates the backplane is configured.
Ready Green Indicates module is healthy.
Fault Red Flashes when the NOE is in crash state.
Run Green Flashes to indicate diagnostic code, as described below.
Coll. Red Flashes when Ethernet collisions occur.
Link Green On when Ethernet link is active.
Tx Act Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet transmission.
Rx Act Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet reception.
10MB Green On when the module is connected to a 10-Megabit network.
100MB Green On when the module is connected to a 100-Megabit network.
Fduplex On when Ethernet is operating in the full duplex mode.
Kernel Amber On when in Kernel Mode.
Flashing while in download mode.
Appl Green On when crash log entry exists.
46 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Run LED Status

The following table lists each available state of the Run LED indicator and provides diagnostic
information for that state in both the 140 NOE 771x1 module and the 140 NWM 100 module.
Indicator State Status for 140NOE771x1 Status for 140NWM100

On (steady) Normal operation: The NOE Normal operation: The NOE
module is ready for network module is ready for network
communication. communication.
Number of flashes in sequence
1 Not used Not used
2 Not used Not used
3 No Link: the network cable is not No Link: the network cable is not
connected or is defective connected or is defective
4 Duplicate IP address: The module Duplicate IP address: The module
will be set to its default IP address. will stay off-line.
5 No IP address: The module is No IP address: The module is
attempting to obtain an IP address attempting to obtain an IP address
from a BOOTP server. Module is from a BOOTP server.
set to its default IP address.
6 Invalid IP configuration. (Likely Using default IP address
cause: Default gateway is not on
the same subnet mask.) Module is
set to its default IP address.
7 No valid executive NOE present No valid executive NOE present
8 Not used Not used
9 - Flash file system inoperative.
33002479 10/2019 47
Product Description
Connectors and Cabling
Overview
The following information describes the 10/100 BASE-T and 100 BASE-FX connectors.
10/100 BASE-T Twisted Pair Connector

The NOE 771 xx, NWM 100 00, and CPU 651 x0 modules’ 10/100 BASE-T connector (shown
below) is a standard RJ-45 twisted pair socket:
Schneider Electric recommends that you use Category 5 STP cabling, which is rated to 100 Mbps,
with an RJ-45 connector.
The eight pins are arranged vertically and numbered in order from the bottom to the top. The RJ-
45 pinout used by this module is:
 Receive Data (+) 3
 Receive Data (-) 6
 Transmit Data (+) 1
 Transmit Data (-) 2
100 BASE-FX
The 100 BASE-FX connector for the NOE 771 xx, NWM 100 00, and CPU 651 60 modules is an
MT-RJ socket or a mating fiber optic cable connector.
For the NOE 771 xx and NWM 100 00, you may need an MT-RJ to SC (duplex) multimode fiber
optic cable assembly 62.5/125mm. Schneider Electric recommends cable number 490NOC00005
to connect to fiber hubs/switches.
NOTE: The NOE 771 xx and NWM 100 00 are one-channel devices that can communicate over
either 10/100 BASE-T or 100 BASE-FX Ethernet networks at any given time, but not over both at
the same time.
48 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Using the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet Module in a Quantum Safety Project
Overview
Version 4.2 and higher of the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet module can be included in one of the
following:
 Quantum safety applications
 non-safety applications
A Quantum safety application is controlled by a Quantum safety PLC, consisting exclusively of

safety modules that perform safety functions. A safety module is denoted by the letter S at the end
of its module name.
When used in a Quantum safety application, the 140 NOE 771 11 is a non-interfering module–it
does not negatively affect the execution of the PLC’s safety functions.
For more information about Quantum safety products, refer to the Quantum Safety PLC Safety
Manual.
Restricted and Unrestricted Memory Areas

The memory addresses of a Quantum safety PLC can be configured as one of the following:
 safety-restricted memory areas
 unrestricted memory areas
Only safety modules can write data to a safety-restricted memory area. For more information about
restricted versus unrestricted memory areas, refer to the topic Safety PLC Write Protection in the
Unity Pro XLS Operating Mode Manual.
The 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet module–as a non-interfering module–cannot write data to safety-
restricted memory areas. Instead, the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet module can write data only to
unrestricted memory areas.
The memory areas of a Quantum safety project are user-configurable. Using Control Expert, you
can designate address ranges as either safety-restricted or unrestricted. For instructions on how
to configure memory areas, refer to the topic Configuration of Quantum Processors with Unity Pro
XLS in the Unity Pro XLS Operating Mode Manual.
33002479 10/2019 49
Product Description
Health Bit Assignments
CAUTION
RISK OF DATA LOSS
The default address assignments for the following data blocks overlap:
 Global Data Health Bit block (%MW1)
 I/O Scanning Health Bit block (%MW1)
 I/O Scanning Device Control block (%MD1)
You must edit these address assignments so they do not overlap. If these address assignments
overlap, the PLC will overwrite data and the overwritten data will be lost.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
The 140 NOE 771 11 makes different address assignments–regarding both I/O Scanning and
Global Data Health Bit Blocks–for safety and non-safety applications, as follows:
Health Bit Block Non-Safety Application Addresses Safety Application Addresses

I/O Scanning %I %M1
%IW %MW1
Global Data %I %MW1 (only)
%IW
%MW
1
All I/O Scanning and Global Data Health Bit Block address assignments, for a Quantum
safety application, must be made in unrestricted memory address areas.
50 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Section 1.3
Installing the Module
Installing the Module
Introduction
This section contains installation and configuration information for the NOE 771 xx Ethernet
modules.

Topic Page
Before You Begin 52
Cable Schemes 54
Security 56
Mounting the Module in the Quantum PLC Backplane 57
Connecting the Cable 59
Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters 60
Establishing the FTP Password 63
Establishing HTTP and Write Passwords for NOE 66
Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters 69
33002479 10/2019 51
Product Description
Before You Begin
Initial Checks
CAUTION
UNINTENTIONAL OPERATION
If you do not enter the correct address pairs into the BOOTP server, you could communicate to
the wrong device.
 Confirm that the MAC address matches the intended IP address in your BOOTP server.
Having two or more devices with the same IP address may cause unpredictable operation of your
network.
 Confirm that your Ethernet module receives a unique IP address.
Complete the following checks before installing the module.

 Determine how the module is assigned its Ethernet address parameters. The default method is
BOOTP.
 Verify that your Ethernet network is properly constructed.
 Verify that you are using the proper cabling scheme (see page 54) for your application.
Determine the Appropriate Ethernet Address Parameters

The module obtains Ethernet address parameters in one of the following ways. Consult your
system administrator to determine which method is suitable.
 Configure new IP, gateway, and subnet mask addresses.
— or —
 The module obtains its Ethernet address parameters from a BOOTP server.
If the administrator assigns new address parameters, configure the module through the Control
Expert interface module configuration screen.
52 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Verify the Network Topology

Schneider Electric recommends that you connect an NOE module to another NOE module or other
device through a hub or a switch (as shown in the following correct network topology graphic).
The following figure shows two incorrect network topologies.
The following figure shows a correct network topology.
33002479 10/2019 53
Product Description
Cable Schemes
Overview
The following information provides guidelines on proper cabling schemes for your Ethernet
configuration.
Twisted Pair Length

In a standard Ethernet cabling scheme network nodes such as the Quantum Ethernet module
connect via a cable to a port on a central hub or switch. The maximum cable length between nodes
depends on whether they are connected through hubs or switches, as the following table
describes:
Device Type Max. Cable Length from Max. Number of Hubs/Switches Max. Distance Between Network
Node to Hub/Switch Between Any Two Nodes Nodes
hub 10 BASE-T: 100 m 3 500 m
switch 10/100 BASE-T: 100 m unlimited unlimited
100 BASE-FX: 2 km
Cabling with Conventional Hubs

The figures and tables that follow show the maximum number of hubs and the maximum cable
length between nodes allowed if using hubs.
10BASE-T Distances with Hubs

The 10 BASE-T cabling allows for 3 hubs with a link maximum distance of 100 m (325 ft) and a
total network diameter of 500 m (1625 ft).
54 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
10/100BASE-T Cable Distances with Switches

The 10/100BASE-T cabling has a link maximum distance of 100 m. The is no limit on the number
of switches.
100BASE-FX
The maximum cable segment length for 100BASE-FX multimode cable (1300 nm) is 2 km. The
number of switches you can implement over that distance is unlimited.
33002479 10/2019 55
Product Description
Security
Overview
The following information describes firewalls. A firewall is a gateway that controls access to your
network. To restrict access to your Ethernet controller and I/O network, you may want to consider
a firewall.
Types of Firewalls
There are network-level and application-level firewalls:
 Network-level firewalls: These firewalls are frequently installed between the Internet and a
single point of entry to an internal, protected network.
 Application-level firewalls: An application-level firewall acts on behalf of an application. It
intercepts all traffic destined for that application and decides whether to forward that traffic to
the application. Application-level firewalls reside on individual host computers.
Port Numbers Used by NOE

The following table contains the port numbers used by NOE:
Protocol Port Number

Modbus/TCP TCP 502
HTTP TCP 80
SNMP UDP 61
FTP TCP 21
You may need to provide the information in this table to your system administrator so that the
firewall configuration will allow access to your PLC from outside of your facility.
56 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Mounting the Module in the Quantum PLC Backplane
Before you Begin

Locate the backplane in which you will mount the module. Ensure that an open slot is available.
NOTE: The module can be installed only in a local backplane.
NOTE: Ensure when installing the module that it does not exceed the Quantum backplane power
requirements as specified in Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware Reference
Manual.
Backplane Slot Replacement

You may place the module in any slot on the backplane. You do not need to place it next to other
modules.
Tools Required
You will need one medium-size, Phillips-head screw driver.
Mounting the Module in the Backplane

Perform the following steps to mount the module.
Step Action
1 Holding the module at an angle, mount it on the two hooks located near the top of
the backplane. The following figure shows the correct way to hold the module.
2 Swing the module down so its connector engages the backplane connector.
3 Using a Phillips-head screw driver, tighten the screw at the bottom of the module
between 2 and 4 in-lbs or between .22 and .45 Newton meters of torque.
33002479 10/2019 57
Product Description
Grounding the Module

The module is grounded upon installation in the Quantum PLC backplane. For instructions on
grounding the backplane, see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware Reference
Manual.
NOTE: If you connect the module to the Ethernet hub or switch using a shielded cable, the cable
is also grounded. Elsewhere in this guide is a discussion of cabling schemes and recommen-
dations Cabling Schemes (see page 54), as well as instructions for connecting the module to an
Ethernet network Connecting the Cable (see page 59).
58 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Connecting the Cable
Overview
The following information pertains to cabling.
NOTE: The 140 NOE 771 xx is capable of communicating over either a 10/100BASE-T or a
100BASE-FX Ethernet network at any given time, but not both at the same time.
Accessories
Schneider Electric sells the following switches:
Hub or Switch Description

499NEH10410 hub with 4 ports 10 BASE-T
499NOH10510 hub with 3 ports 10 BASE-T and 2 ports 10 BASE-FL
499NTR10010 transceiver 10 BASE-T/10 BASE-FL
499NEH14100 hub with 4 ports 100 BASE-TX
499NTR10100 transceiver 100 BASE-TX
499NES18100 switch with 8 ports 10/100 BASE-TX
499NES17100 managed switch with 7 ports 10/100 BASE-TX
499NOS17100 managed switch with 5 ports 10/100 BASE-TX and 2 ports
100 BASE-FX
The following Schneider Electric cables support multicast filtering (see page 190):
Cable Description
490NTW000 02/05/12/40/80 U StraightThru cable
490NTC000 05/15/40/80 U Crossover cable
Fiber Optic
Remove the protective cap from the module’s MT-RJ connector port and the protective cap from
the tip of the black connector on the MT-RJ fiber optic cable (as shown in the following figure). The
plug only fits to the socket in one way. It should snap into place.
33002479 10/2019 59
Product Description
Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters
Overview
CAUTION
If you do not enter the correct address pairs into the BOOTP server, you could communicate to
the wrong device.
 Ensure that the MAC address matches the intended IP address in your BOOTP server.
Having two or more devices with the same IP address can cause unpredictable operation of your
network.
 Ensure that your Ethernet module receives a unique IP address.
The following information describes how to assign IP address parameters.

As shipped from the factory, the 140 NOE 771 xx module does not contain an IP address. If you
have not programmed the unit with an Ethernet configuration extension, the module does not
contain an IP address. When the module starts up without an IP address, the module will attempt
to obtain an IP address from the network’s BOOTP server.
You can assign IP address parameters using the BOOTP Lite software utility.
NOTE: You can configure the IP address using Web pages on the modules 140 NOE 771 01, -11,
and NWM 100 00.
Using a BOOTP Server

A BOOTP server is a program that manages the IP addresses assigned to devices on the network.
Your system administrator can confirm whether a BOOTP server exists on your network and can
help you use the server to maintain the adapter’s IP address.
See Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters, page 69.
How an Unconfigured Module Obtains an IP Address

On startup, an unconfigured NOE 771 xx module ("as shipped") will attempt to obtain an IP
address by issuing BOOTP requests. When a response from a BOOTP server is obtained, the IP
address in the response is used. If no BOOTP response is received within two minutes, the module
uses the default IP address derived from its MAC address.
NOTE: The MAC address is assigned at the factory and is recorded on a label on the front panel,
above the cable connector. This is a unique 48-bit global assigned address. It is set in PROM. The
Ethernet address is recorded on the label in hexadecimal, in the form 00.00.54.xx.xx.xx.
60 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Connecting to the Default IP Address

To connect to the default IP address with your PC, set up an active route from your PC. To do this
with Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000 or Windows XP, use the following procedure. You can use the
routes for connecting Ethernet components with other address ranges.
Step Action
1 Be sure the NOE module is running.
2 Obtain the default IP address of the NOE derived from its MAC address (for example,
84.0.0.2).
3 Open an MS-DOS window.
4 Add an active route for the local NOE by typing:
C:\>ROUTE ADD <target> MASK <mask> <gateway>
e.g.
C:\>ROUTE ADD 84.0.0.0 MASK 255.0.0.0 205.217.193.205
Use the default IP address of the NOE module as target address. Use a class A subnet
mask for connecting to every 84.0.0.0 address. The gateway address is the IP of your
PC. The result is that MS Windows will now talk to any address that starts with an 84
that is directly connected to a hub or switch directly accessible to your machine, or that
can be seen by the specified route/gateway.
5 Confirm that there is a new entry in the active route table by typing:
C:\>route print:
The following figure confirms that the new entry was added to the active route table.
6 Verify that a connection is made by typing:

C:\>ping 84.0.0.2
The following figure shows that the connection is verified.
Specifying Address Parameters

Consult your system administrator to obtain a valid IP address and an appropriate gateway and a
subnet mask, if required. Then use your programming panel to make the appropriate changes.
33002479 10/2019 61
Product Description
BOOTP Server Responds

If the server responds with address parameters, the NOE 771 xx module will use those parameters
as long as power remains applied to the module.
If the server does not respond, the module will retry its request for two minutes.
BOOTP Server Does Not Respond

If no BOOTP response is received, the NOE 771 xx module will use the default IP Address.
During this time the Run indicator displays a pattern of five flashes for a BOOTP attempt and six
flashes for using the default IP.
NOE 771 xx Duplicate IP Address Test

In all cases, when the NOE 771 xx module receives an IP address, it will test for duplicate
addresses by sending broadcast ARP requests three times at 5-second intervals.
If a Duplicate IP Address is found on the network, the NOE 771 xx will stay off-line to avoid a
network disruption. It will display a pattern of four flashes to indicate a Duplicate IP Address
detection.
Automatic ARP
If there are no replies to its requests, the NOE 771 xx automatically sends three ARP requests at
2-second intervals to announce its presence on the network.
62 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Establishing the FTP Password
Establishing the FTP Password

The FTP password is established using the Embedded Web Server. This topic contains
information on how to access the web server for purposes of changing the FTP and HTTP
passwords. The first thing the system administrator should do upon accessing the web server is
change the FTP password. Doing this restricts access to the web server functionality to the system
administrator.
Web server pages and their functionality are discussed in deatil in the chapter Embedded Web
Pages.
Introduction to Accessing the Web Server

Each Quantum NOE module contains an embedded Web server, which allows you to access
diagnostics and online configurations for the module and its associated controller (PLC).
The web pages can only be viewed using Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher supporting JRE 1.4.2_04
or higher.
For information about the additional functionality provided by the FactoryCast system in the NOE
modules, see the FactoryCast Manual.
How to Access the Web Server

Before you can access the module’s home page, you must enter the full IP address in the Address
or Location box in the browser window. For example: http://hostname (hostname is the full IP
address or DNS host name).
After you do this, the Schneider Electric Web Utility home page displays.
Schneider Web Utility Home Page

From the Quantum home page, you can access pages for:
 changing the FTP password (see page 64)
 changing the HTTP password (see page 67)
 diagnostic and configuration information (the embedded Web pages chapter provides additional
information)
33002479 10/2019 63
Product Description
Modifying the FTP Server Password

The following steps detail how to link to the correct web page for modifying the FTP password
Step Action
1 Enter the URL, for example,
http://hostname/secure/embedded/ftp_passwd_config.htm
2 At that URL, supply a user name and password:
Note: The default User name is USER, and the default Password is USERUSER.
Both should be changed by the system administrator during module installation.
3 Upon supplying the user name, password, and clicking the OK button, the Modify
FTP Server User Name and Password page displays.
FTP Username and Password Modify Page Overview

The following figure shows the page used for modifying the FTP user name and password:
64 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Change the Username and Password

At this point, the system administrator should change the Username and Password to restrict future
access to the system. The following steps should be used.
Step Action
1 Type in the new Username in the New User Name field.
2 Type in the new Password in the New Password field.
3 Click the Submit FTP Password Change button.
The following figure shows the message that is generated if you click on the Submit FTP Password
Change button:
Clicking the Reboot Device button will reset the username and password for the NOE board.
NOTE: The reboot requires about 40 seconds. (With large applications, reboot may require up to
one (1) minute.)
During the reboot, all services provided by the NOE module are not available.
33002479 10/2019 65
Product Description
Establishing HTTP and Write Passwords for NOE
Overview
The following information describes how to set the passwords for HTTP and Data Monitor Write for
the NOE.
Connect to the Web Page

Before you can change the HTTP or Data Monitor Write passwords, connect to the correct web
page:
Step Action
1 Enter the URL, for example,
http://hostname/secure/embedded/http_passwd_config.htm
2 At that URL, supply a user name and password in the dialog box. The size of the user
name and password is a maximum of 16 characters in non-extended ASCII.
Note: The default User Name is USER, and the default Password is USER. Both
should be changed by the system administrator during module installation.
3 Upon supplying the user name, password, and clicking the OK button, the Modify
Passwords page displays.
66 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Modify Passwords Page

A single web page is used to modify both the HTTP and Data Monitor Write passwords:
33002479 10/2019 67
Product Description
Changing Security Access Parameters

A system administrator should change the default username (USER) and password (USER) to
restrict future access to the system. After you decide whether you are changing the HTTP or Write
Password security parameters, follow the appropriate procedure below:
HTTP (Username and Password)
Step Action
1 Type a new username in the New User Name field.
2 Type a new password in the New Password field.
3 Confirm the new password in the Confirm Password field.
4 Click the Change HTTP Access button.
Data Monitor Write (Password)
Step Action
1 Type the old password in the Write Password field.
2 Type a new password in the New Password field.
3 Confirm the new password in the Confirm Password field.
4 Click the Change Write Password button.
Security Access Change Verification

The following figure shows the message that is generated if you click the Change HTTP Access or
Change Write Password button:
Clicking the Reboot Device button will reset the username and password for the NOE board.
NOTE: The Reboot will take about 40 seconds. Larger applications can take up to one (1) minute.
During the reboot all services provided by the NOE are not available.
68 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters
Overview
CAUTION
Ensure that the MAC address matches the intended IP address in your BOOTP server. If you do
not enter the correct address pairs into the BOOTP server, you could communicate to the wrong
device.
The following information describes how to use the BOOTP Lite utility software.
BOOTP Lite Utility

Instead of a BOOTP server, Schneider Electric’s BOOTP Lite Server Software utility can be used
to provide the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway to the NOE 771 xx module.
Refer to the BOOTP Lite Server Software user documentation for instructions.
NOTE: BOOTP Lite Server Software and user documentation are available for download at
www.modicon.com.
33002479 10/2019 69
Product Description
Section 1.4
Customer Support
Customer Support
Overview
This section tells you how to get customer support from Schneider Electric’s documentation and
regional help centers.

Topic Page
Customer Support Documentation 71
Contact Information 72
70 33002479 10/2019
Product Description
Customer Support Documentation
Support Documentation
If you have any problems, please first consult the documentation listed above or the MS-Windows
documentation.
For the most up-to-date NOE Ethernet controller information, please:
Step Action
1 Access the Schneider Electric Web site.
2 Search technical information.
3 Select Quantum from the list of cross-product families.
4 Access either:
 resolutions for resolutions to product issues
 product manuals for the most recently published user documentation
 product announcements
33002479 10/2019 71
Product Description
Contact Information
Contact Information
Please find the nearest Schneider Electric sales office by visiting http://www.schneider-
electric.com. In the Select a country list, click the country closest to you for customer support.
72 33002479 10/2019
Ethernet Communication Services
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 2
Introduction
This chapter describes the Ethernet communications services available on 140 NOE 771 x1 and
140 CPU 651 x0.

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Services 74
Address Server 76
SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview 78
Modbus Messaging 79
I/O Scanner 81
Global Data 83
Time Synchronization 84
Electronic Mail Notification 85
Bandwidth Monitoring 86
FTP Server 87
Embedded Web Pages (HTTP Server, Web Configuration and Diagnostics) 88
Additional Ethernet Services 90
33002479 10/2019 73
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Services
Table of Ethernet Services

The Ethernet services of the 140 NOE 771 01, 140 NOE 771 11, and CPU 651 x0 add
functionality to the system. Some services can be configured, others require no configuration.
Some services provide diagnostic information. Access to the services is through either a Web page
or the Control Expert application.
NOE 771 01 NOE 771 11 CPU 651 x0

Service
Address Server (see page 76) configure Web Web Web
Control Expert Control Expert
diagnostic NA NA NA
BOOTP Client (see page 69) configure Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
diagnostic NA NA NA
SNMP V2 Agent (Network configure Web Web Web
Management Service) (see page 78) Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
diagnostic NA NA NA
Schneider Private MIB (see page 78) configure NA NA NA
diagnostic NA NA NA
Modbus Messaging (see page 79) configure Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
diagnostic Web Web Web
Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
I/O Scanner (see page 81) configure Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) configure Web Web Control Expert
(see page 83) Control Expert Control Expert
Time Synchronization Service configure NA Web NA
(see page 84) diagnostic NA Web NA
Electronic Mail Notification Service configure Web Web Web
(see page 85) diagnostic Web Web Web
Bandwidth Monitoring (see page 86) configure Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
FTP Server (see page 87) configure NA NA NA
diagnostic NA NA NA
74 33002479 10/2019
NOE 771 01 NOE 771 11 CPU 651 x0

Service
HTTP Server (see page 88) configure NA NA NA
diagnostic NA NA NA
Fast Device Replacement (Server) configure Web Web Control Expert
(see page 237) Control Expert Control Expert
diagnostic NA NA NA
Hot Standby configure NA NA NA
diagnostic NA NA NA
Flash File System (see page 90) configure NA NA NA
diagnostic NA NA NA
FactoryCast Application configure NA Web NA
(see page 90) diagnostic NA Web NA
33002479 10/2019 75
Address Server
Overview
The following information describes the services provided by the address server.
 BOOTP server
 DHCP server
The DHCP server responds to both a DHCP and a BOOTP server.
BOOTP Server
NOTE: The BOOTP server is available on the 140 NOE 771 xx models.
The BOOTstrap Protocol (BOOTP) software, compliant with RFC 951, is used to assign IP
addresses to nodes on an Ethernet network. Devices (hosts) on the network send BOOTP
requests during their initialization sequence. A BOOTP server that receives the request will extract
the required IP address information from its database and place it in BOOTP response messages
to the requesting devices. The devices will use the assigned IP addresses from the BOOTP server
for all network communication.
NOTE: In order for BOOTP to work properly, you need to correctly configure the following:
 IP address
 subnetwork mask
 gateway address
NOE BOOTP Server

Your NOE 771 xx module comes supplied with a BOOTP server. This feature allows you to provide
IP addresses to all the I/O devices being serviced by the NOE 771 xx. Providing a BOOTP server
that is built into your NOE 771 xx module eliminates the need for an external BOOTP server.
NOTE: The NOE 771 xx’s BOOTP server can not provide its own IP address.
You can configure your NOE 771 xx’s BOOTP server from the module’s HTTP Web page.
Configure the 140 CPU 651 x0 using the Control Expert editors. Configuring allows you to add to,
remove from, and edit devices in the BOOTP server’s database, which is maintained in the
module’s non-volatile memory.
76 33002479 10/2019
DHCP Server
NOTE: The DHCP server is available on the 140 NOE 771 x1 models.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a superset of the BOOTP protocol. Your
140 NOE 771 x1 has a DHCP server. The DHCP server is compliant with RFC 1531. The DHCP
server can be used to provide the IP configuration to devices using BOOTP or devices using
DHCP.
The DHCP server has entries that use the MAC address to serve the IP configuration and entries
in the server that use the role name to serve the IP configuration. Elsewhere in this book are details
for the NOE address server configuration (see page 237).
If you are migrating a BOOTP configuration from a 140 NOE 771 x0 module to the new
140 NOE 771 x1 module, see Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement
(see page 237) for details on the automatic upgrade of your configuration for the new DHCP
server.
NOTE: Before placing the NOE on a corporate network, Schneider Electric recommends that you
discuss the installation with your MIS department. It is likely that your company's corporate network
has at least one DHCP server running already. If the NOE's DHCP server is running on the same
network, it may disturb the network.
To avoid any possible problem related to the NOE's DHCP server on the corporate network, ensure
that the DHCP server is not running in the NOE by not having address entries in the configuration.
If there are no configured devices in the address server configuration page (see page 237), then
the NOE will not start the DHCP server.
Device Replacement
Fast device replacement and the address server are discussed in detail at Address Server
Configuration/Fast Device Replacement (see page 237).
33002479 10/2019 77
SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview
Overview
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is configured on your NOE or 140 CPU 651 x0.
Introduction
Network management software allows a network manager to:
 monitor and control network components
 isolate problems and find their causes
 query devices, such as a host computer(s), routers, switches, and bridges, to determine their
status
 obtain statistics about the networks to which they are attached
Simple Network Management Protocol

Your NOE module or 140 CPU 651 x0 controller supports the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP), which is the standard protocol used to manage a local area network (LAN).
SNMP defines exactly how a manager communicates with an agent.
The SNMP defines the format of:
 requests that a manager sends to an agent
 replies that the agent returns to the manager
MIB
Each object to which SNMP has access must be defined and given a unique name. Manager and
agent programs must both agree on the names and meanings of the fetch and store operations.
The set of all objects SNMP can access is known as a Management Information Base (MIB).
Private MIB
Schneider obtained a private MIB, Groupe_Schneider (3833). Under the Groupe Schneider private
MIB is a Transparent Factory Ethernet (TFE) private MIB. The Transparent Factory SNMP
embedded component controls the Schneider private MIB function.
78 33002479 10/2019
Modbus Messaging
Overview
The following information describes the functionality of the Modbus/TCP server.
The Client
The node that initiates a data transaction is called a client. All Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules
provide the user with the capability to transfer data to and from nodes on a TCP/IP network using
a communication instruction. All PLCs that support networking communication capabilities over
Ethernet can use either the MBP_MSTR Ladder Logic instruction to read or write controller
information or IEC communication blocks.
The Server
The node that receives an inquiry is the server. Using the standard Modbus/TCP protocol, all
Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules provide access to controller data. Any device, PC, HMI
package, another PLC, or any Modbus/TCP compliant device, can access data from the PLC. The
Modbus/TCP server also allows programming panels to log into the controller over Ethernet.
Modbus/TCP Connections and Commands

The Ethernet module supports up to 64 simultaneous Modbus/TCP server connections. To
guarantee consistency of changes to the controller configuration, the Ethernet module allows only
one programming panel to be logged in at a time.
The Ethernet modules supports these Modbus/TCP commands:
 Read Data
 Write Data
 Read/Write Data
 Get Remote Statistics
 Clear Remote Statistics
 Modbus 125 Commands (used by programming panels to download a new exec to the NOE)
The maximum register size for read requests, write requests, or read/write requests made using
either a MBP_MSTR or Modbus command is as follows:
Command Request Type Maximum size

Read 125 read registers
Write 123 read registers
Read/Write 125 read registers / 121 write registers
33002479 10/2019 79
Performance
The following table shows the performance characteristics of the NOE Ethernet module’s
Modbus/TCP server.
Parameter Value
Typical Response Time (ms) 0.6
Number of Modbus connections (client and server) 64 (NOE 771 x1, NWM 100 00,
HE CPU 651 x0), 16 Client
(NOE 771 x0), 32 Server
(NOE 771 x0)
Number of simultaneous login channels 1
NOTE: Ethernet module’s Modbus/TCP performance measurements are made with a Modicon
Quantum 140 CPU 534 14A PLC.
80 33002479 10/2019
I/O Scanner
Introduction
The functionality of your Ethernet module is further enhanced by the addition of an I/O Scanner,
which you can configure with the Schneider Electric programming panels.
I/O Scanner Features

NOE version 3.5 and later include these enhancements:
Feature Availability Improvement Description

Improved Timeout and Control Expert Improves TCP connection 2004 version uses a variable timeout.
Retry Transmission Concept management Older versions used a fixed timeout.
algorithm ProWORX Difference: Faster retransmission rates
Enable/Disable I/O Control Expert Reduces network traffic Use the ‘Device Control Block’
Scanner entry Concept volume  Set = 0 Enable channel for normal
data exchange
 Set = 1 Disable channel
Note: Concept Users

Concept uses diagnostic words.
Set = FF Disable channel
Send Modbus requests Control Expert Allows routers to connect Automatic
across a router Concept remote I/O devices to a
ProWORX controller
Dynamic TCP port Control Expert Improves Reserves TCP client ports 3072 (0xC00)
allocation Concept connection/disconnection through 4992 (0x1380)
ProWORX performance Allocates ports dynamically
Repetitive rate display Control Expert Check status using GUI Status displays in I/O Scanning tab of
module editor
33002479 10/2019 81
I/O Scanner Parameters

Functionality of the I/O Scanner.
Parameter Value
Max. No. of Devices 64: 140 NOE 771 00 (Version 2.2 or earlier)
128: 140 NOE 771 00 (Version 3.0 or later), 140 NOE 771 01,
and 140 NOE 771 11 only
128: HE CPU 651 x0
Max. No. of Input Words 4000
Max. No. of Output Words 4000
Health Timeout Value User configured: 1...65535 ms in 1 ms increments
Last Value (Input) User configured (zero or Hold)
IP Address User configured
IP address of scanned device (Slave IP)
Local and Remote Register User configured
Reference
Repetitive Rate User configured: 0...65535 in multiples of:
 16 ms, for 140 NOE 771 x1
 10 ms, for 140 CPU 651 x0
Unit ID User configured

Configure ID only if using a bridge
Operation through a bridge Modbus bridge: Supported
Modbus Plus bridge: Supported
Gateway/Bridge Device Select the check box if you are using a bridge or a gateway
device.
The I/O Scanner Concepts topic (see page 200) explains how to configure the I/O scanner.
Performance
Performance data details are provided at I/O Scanner Response Times topic (see page 233).
82 33002479 10/2019
Global Data
Overview
The Global Data service is a real-time publisher/subscriber mechanism providing the most efficient
data exchange for PLC application coordination.
Devices that support Global Data are arranged in a distribution group for the purpose of application
variable exchange and synchronization. Each Global Data device can publish up to one network
(application) variable and subscribe up to 64 network (application) variables.
The Quantum NOE module’s embedded Global Data Configuration Page provides a configuration
screen to determine which and how many application variables are exchanged with this service.
After configuration, the exchanges between all stations belonging to the same distribution group
are done automatically.
The Global Data service uses %MW words (4x registers) or unlocated variables for Global Data
exchanges.
Key Features of Global Data

The main features for Global Data are:
 One publisher and multiple subscribers
 A device can publish one network variable of up to 512 %MW words (4x registers) or unlocated
variables
 A device can subscribe to several network variables of up to 2048 %MW words (4x registers)
or unlocated variables
 A device subscribes to the complete network variable
 One distribution group per network IP address
 Application defined publication rate
 Up to 64 Global Data network variables (numbered from 1 to 64) can be part of the data
distribution group
 The NOE module has only one multicast address; consequently, it can only publish and
subscribe inside the group
 A device can participate in several distribution groups by using multiple NOE communication
modules in the rack
Global Data's publish/subscribe mechanism allows multiple subscribers to receive a single data
transmission. This is an advantage over client/server services, which require multiple
transmissions to specific destinations. There are two immediate benefits:
 reduces overall network traffic
 ensures tighter synchronization of multiple subscribers
33002479 10/2019 83
Time Synchronization
General
The time service synchronizes computer clocks over the Internet. For example, the time of one
client is synchronized either with another server or to a referenced time source like a radio or
satellite receiver.
Typical time service configurations utilize multiple redundant servers and diverse network paths to
achieve high accuracy and reliability. Time service accuracy can be within a millisecond on LANs
and up to a few tenths of milliseconds on WANs.
Use the time service for:
 event recording: sequence events
 event synchronization: trigger simultaneous events
 alarm and I/O synchronization: time stamp alarms
Time Synchronization and Time Stamps

On an Ethernet network, all controllers should be synchronized with the same clock time, which is
provided by an NTP server. In each application program, events or application data (I/O values for
example) can be time stamped using the application stacks.
The Ethernet interface module connects to an NTP time server and provides the source-time
synchronization signal, which is sent to the CPU.
To read the clock, a function block is used in the controller’s project (application program):
84 33002479 10/2019
Electronic Mail Notification
General
The electronic mail notification service allows controller-based projects to report alarms or events.
The automation controller monitors the system and can automatically create an electronic mail
message alert with data, alarms, and/or events. Mail recipients can be either local or remote.
 Based on predefined events or conditions, messages are created using the MBP_STR function
block.
 The email message is constructed from predefined headers plus variables and text (a maximum
of 238 bytes). This message is sent directly from the automation system to the local email
server.
 Mail headers contain common predefined items—recipient list, sender name, and subject.
These items can be updated by an authorized administrator.
Mail Service Client

The NOE communications module and 140 CPU 651 x0 modules include an SMTP client. When
the module receives a specific request from the controller, the module sends an email message to
the mail server.
33002479 10/2019 85
Bandwidth Monitoring
Overview
Bandwidth Monitoring allows the user to access and monitor the NOE module’s CPU allocation for
each of the following services:
 Global Data (see page 185)
 I/O scanning (see page 199)
 Modbus messaging (see page 79)
The Bandwidth Monitoring service retrieves workload data and returns one of two pieces of
information: whether the module has free resources or whether the module is working at capacity.
Knowing the resource allocation helps you:
 assess resource allocation
 determine the number of NOEs needed in a system
NOTE: Users who want to use Bandwidth Monitoring do not need to develop a new set of access
functions. The actual NOE CPU load is computed each second.
Bandwidth Monitoring Load Rates

The Bandwidth Monitoring service checks once a second and computes four (4) values in private
data. These values are returned as the percentage of the NOE’s CPU that is allocated to:
 Global Data (see page 185)
 I/O scanner (see page 199)
 Modbus messaging (see page 79)
 other services and idle
CPU time spent in other services is shown as "Other" or "Free." Bandwidth Monitoring uses the
same functions as used by SNMP.
The three service rates, Global Data, I/O Scanner, and Messaging, are computed using the
following formula:
(Current load * 100) / Maximum Load
The table shows the (dynamically computed) Maximum Load Rate for the NOE module:
Diagnostic Service Workload Data Returned Maximum Load

Global Data Number of published variables per second 800
I/O Scanner Number of transactions per second 4200
Messaging Number of messages treated per second 410
NOTE: The loads depend on controller scan times. Each application has an expected scan time.
Therefore, when evaluating loads, ensure that the controller scan time is set to the expected scan
time for the modeled application.
86 33002479 10/2019
FTP Server
Overview
The following information describes the services provided by the FTP Server. The FTP server is
available on all:
 140 NOE 771 xx communications modules (including the NOE module)
 CPU 651 x0 modules
FTP Server
The FTP server on the NOE module and CPU 651 x0s is available as soon as the module receives
an IP address. Any FTP client can log on to the module, which requires the client use the correct
user name and password.
The FTP Server can:
 update the NOE module’s firmware by downloading a new Exec
 provide error log visibility by uploading error log files
 upload/download BOOTP server and SNMP configuration files
NOTE: There is only one FTP client per module.

The FTP server is protected with a default user name and password.
Default user name USER

case-sensitive
Default password USERUSER
case-sensitive
See the FTP password (see page 63) topic to change the password or add/delete usernames
on the FTP server.
33002479 10/2019 87
Embedded Web Pages (HTTP Server, Web Configuration and Diagnostics)
HTTP Server
The Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet modules’ Hypertext Transport Protocol
(HTTP) server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address.
Use the HTTP Server to:
1. view . . .
 the module's Ethernet statistics
 the controller and I/O information
 the server information (BOOTP/DHCP/FDR)
 the diagnostic information for some Ethernet services
2. configure the module's Ethernet services
Use Internet Explorer version 4.0 or later. For a complete list of services, see the Key Features
table (see page 44).
The HTTP server is protected with a default user name and password.
Default user name USER

case-sensitive
Default password USER
case-sensitive
The size of the user name and password is a maximum of 16 characters in non-extended
ASCII.
NOTE: The NOE 771 xx and CPU 651 xx support a maximum of 32 HTTP simultaneous
connections. Browsers may open multiple connections so 32 HTTP connections do not indicate 32
simultaneous users.
NOTE: The NOE 771 00 and NOE 771 01 modules do not support user downloaded Web pages.
You will need to purchase either the NOE 771 10, NOE 771 11, or the NWM 100 00 module to
support user downloaded Web pages.
88 33002479 10/2019
Web Diagnostics
The embedded Web server provides Web pages to diagnose the following Transparent
Factory/Real Time services.
Diagnostic Service Description

Global Data (see page 83)  status of all Global Data services
 status of all subscribed and published variables
 publication/subscription rate
I/O Scanning (see page 81)  status of all I/O Scanning services
 status of individual scanned devices
 actual I/O scanning rate
Messaging (see page 79)  diagnostic information for Port 502 messaging
Time Synchronization  status of client and link to the server

(see page 84)  date and time
 status of Daylight Saving Time (DST) option
Electronic Mail Notification  status of SMTP server

(see page 85)  track messages sent and received
 track errors
Bandwidth Monitoring  throughput measurement of NOE by service

(see page 86)
NOTE: All these pages are protected by the general HTTP password.
Web Configuration
Elsewhere in this guide is a description of the web configuration pages (see page 88).
33002479 10/2019 89
Additional Ethernet Services
Hot Standby
The Ethernet Hot Standby system consists of two identical Modicon Quantum systems. Each
Quantum system contains:
 a Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Control Expert controller (140 CPU 671 xx0),
(140 CPU 672 xx0) or (140 CPU 678 61)
 a remote I/O head
 NOE 771 xx modules (no more than six)
 a power supply
The Hot Standby modules are connected to each other via a fiber-optic cable. Both remote I/O
heads are connected to the remote I/O network and to each other.
Schneider Electric recommends:
1. remote I/O networks use redundant cables (drops are not redundant)
2. switch connecting the NOEs to the network (available switches):
 499NES17100
 499NOS17100
FactoryCast and User Customizable Web Pages

FactoryCast is a software package that you use to customize a Web site on the embedded Web
server module. The site can be accessed via a browser to view and modify data from a Modicon
Quantum with Control Expert controller (PLC).
FactoryCast provides all the Web pages and Java applets you need to view run-time data from
your controller. You can use the FactoryCast default Web site simply by configuring the module
and accessing it with a browser over an intranet.
Modules that use FactoryCast to add customized web pages on a site are:
 NOE 771 10
 NOE 771 11
 140 NWM 100 00
Flash File System

The NOE 771 xx modules are equipped with a Flash File System, which allows changing or
updating the executive, kernel, and Web site files by an upload.
90 33002479 10/2019
Ethernet Services
33002479 10/2019
Part II
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Modules Services
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Modules

Services
33002479 10/2019 91
Ethernet Services
92 33002479 10/2019
Start Communication with Control Expert
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 3
Introduction
This chapter tells you how to begin Ethernet network configuration with Control Expert.

Section Topic Page
3.1 How to Configure the Communication 94
3.2 Control Expert Communication Links 99
3.3 Selecting the Ethernet Module 103
3.4 Selecting the Ethernet Coprocessor 112
33002479 10/2019 93
Section 3.1
How to Configure the Communication
How to Configure the Communication
Overview
This section describes how to configure the communication.

Topic Page
Add a New Network to the Communication Folder 95
Configure Network 96
Properties of a Network 97
Delete an Existing Network Folder 98
94 33002479 10/2019
Add a New Network to the Communication Folder
Add a New Network to the Communication Folder

After starting a new application, the Communication folder under the Station tree branches the
Network folder and the Routing table folder (Premium platforms only). These two folders are
empty. Under the Network folder, the user can insert the networks by menu. A click on the right
mouse-button above Network pops up a contextual menu. The user selects the type of network he
wants to add. For easier use, a network name will be suggested with the prefix of the network type
(Ethernet_1 or Modbus+_1). By choosing a new network the next available number for the network
is chosen automatically, for example, Ethernet_1 then Ethernet_2 and so on. At any moment, the
user may rename any Netlink.
The user can also attach a comment that describes each configured network. The OK button adds
the network as subfolder.
The names of network nodes are also called NetLink. These are the names of logical networks.
33002479 10/2019 95
Configure Network
Configure Network
On the network folder, by a double-clicking action or by the Open item on contextual menu, the
editor of the corresponding communication screen is opened in order to set the specific network
services.
The figure shows the contextual menu to start network properties.
96 33002479 10/2019
Properties of a Network
Properties of a Network
The contextual menu proposes the user to see again the properties of a configured network. Here,
the user can change the NetLink name and the associated comment.
The figure shows the Ethernet property window:
33002479 10/2019 97
Delete an Existing Network Folder
Delete an Existing Network Folder

With a right-mouse-click above the network folder, a contextual menu appears. Here the user is
able to delete the network configuration. In this case, the subfolder of the network will also be
removed in application browser.
NOTE: If this removed network was previously attached to a communication module, this module
loses its link and it will work with its default parameters.
98 33002479 10/2019
Section 3.2
Control Expert Communication Links
Control Expert Communication Links
Overview
This section presents the principle of communication implementation and describes the
relationship between software configuration of networks and the hardware configuration of the
network controllers.

Topic Page
Communication Configuration Principle 100
Link between Configuration and Communication 101
Link between Data and Communication 102
33002479 10/2019 99
Communication Configuration Principle
Introduction
The configuration of communication links between different devices with Control Expert includes
three different configuration parts.
 configuration of the network controller
 configuration of the logical network
 configuration of network variables
Configuration
The communication configuration supports the free mode of Control Expert. That means the user
can first configure the module and then the communication or the user can configure the
communication and then the module.
This will be provided through a NetLink that must be selected in the module configuration. The
network variables including in the VAR folder are linked with a group name that defines an IP
domain over Internet network.
The illustration shows the three parts involved in communication configuration:
100 33002479 10/2019

Link between Configuration and Communication
NetLinks
During Control Expert application design, the NetLinks are created and inserted on sub-folder
Communication under Network. These are the names of logical networks.
Under configuration folder, on the communication module node included in the current station, the
list of existing NetLinks is proposed to select and attach one network to one module. Only the
NetLink that can be managed by this module, are displayed in the list box on module configuration
screen. No NetLink can be edited and created here (no edit box), but this list contains at least the
No_Link field.
The following figure shows the window for the Ethernet link for the Quantum NOE module.
Attaching a NetLink to a Module

When a network is attached to a module, the icon of the corresponding node is changed and the
network editor displays the address of the module in the rack .
The Icon in the Network folder indicates whether the link is attached to a module or not:
Icon when no communication module is

attached to the NetLink
Icon when a communication module has

been attached to the NetLink
33002479 10/2019 101

Link between Data and Communication
Network Variables and Groups

The groups of Ethernet network variables are created in the Ethernet network communication
folders. An IP domain determines a group. In Control Expert, one network can support only one
group.
In Data Editor, the list of all current groups is provided to select in which group each Ethernet
network variables is included. Nevertheless, the group field is also a free entry editing box, in order
to give a group name not yet defined in communication folder. The build step checks this link.
The illustration shows corresponding fields in Communication configuration and the Data Editor:
102 33002479 10/2019

Section 3.3
Selecting the Ethernet Module
Selecting the Ethernet Module
Introduction
This chapter contains the software pages for the NOE module.

Topic Page
Selecting the Quantum NOE Ethernet Module 104
Security (Enable / Disable HTTP, FTP, and TFTP) 107
IP Configuration 108
Quantum NOE Ethernet Messaging Configuration 109
33002479 10/2019 103

Selecting the Quantum NOE Ethernet Module
General Description
After configuring Ethernet communication (see page 95), the Ethernet module parameters can be
configured.
When you select the model family, all the corresponding communication module configuration
options are displayed automatically. The module services allow the following settings to be made:
Setting Description
No Setting deactivated.
Yes Setting activated. Parameters are set using the Control Expert menu window.
Web Setting activated. Parameters are set using the configured NOE Web pages.
Control Expert menu window deactivated.
Note: Not available for every model family.
NOTE: The availability of the displayed settings depends on the selected model family and can
vary.
104 33002479 10/2019

The screen shot shows an example of the menu window of the NOE Ethernet module (TCP/IP
10/100 Regular connection).
Parameter description:
Parameter Description
Model Family Quantum NOE Ethernet Module settings
Module Address Not used
Module Utilities For module service configuration options, see above
Module IP Address Overview of the IP address parameter set
33002479 10/2019 105

After selecting the model family TCP/IP 10/100 Regular Connection, the following mask appears.
The image also displays the activated module services.
NOTE: The availability of the displayed register depends on the selected model family and can
vary.
After selecting the Yes option in module services, the tab corresponding to the module is activated.
106 33002479 10/2019

Security (Enable / Disable HTTP, FTP, and TFTP)
Security and HTTP, FTP, and TFTP Services

The module uses HTTP services to provide access to its embedded Web pages. The module uses
FTP and TFTP services to support various features including firmware upgrades, FDR services,
and Ethernet remote IO.
The module’s HTTP, FTP, and TFTP services can be disabled or enabled using the Control Expert
Network Editor → Security screen.
HTTP, FTP, and TFTP services are disabled by default in projects created using Quantum EIO
Version 1.5 and Unity Pro Version 8 or higher. They are enabled by default in projects created
using previous versions of Unity Pro.
You can use Control Expert to enable or disable HTTP, FTP, and TFTP services as described in
the following procedure.
If the HTTP, FTP, or TFTP services have been enabled with Control Expert, they can also be
enabled or disabled at run time using an MBP_MSTR block with operation code 65520 (dec)
(see Quantum EIO, Control Network, Installation and Configuration Guide).
Using Control Expert to Enable and Disable Firmware Upgrade & FDR and Web Access Services
Perform the following steps to enable or disable FTP/TFTP or HTTP services on the module.
Step Action
1 In the Control Expert Project Browser → Structural View, double-click the desired network in the
Communication → Networks directory to open the Network Editor.
2 Click the Security tab.
3 On the Security screen, choose the appropriate setting: (Enabled or Disabled) for the service or
services.
The edits will not take effect until they are successfully downloaded from your PC to the CPU and
from the CPU to the communication modules and network devices.
33002479 10/2019 107

IP Configuration
General Description
The IP configuration tab enables you to configure IP address settings for the Quantum Ethernet
module. IP address settings become active after:
 the hardware is connected
 the configuration is downloaded to the PLC in the Quantum Ethernet module
The following figure shows the IP configuration for the Quantum Ethernet model family:
Description of the selection properties
Selection Description
Configured Activate the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address. The data
is activated after the configuration is downloaded to the PLC.
Client / Server The Quantum NOE Ethernet module receives its IP address parameter
through a BOOTP server on startup.
Ethernet Select the default protocol as Ethernet or 802.3.
configuration
108 33002479 10/2019

Quantum NOE Ethernet Messaging Configuration
Introduction
Ethernet messaging gives the user the opportunity to send and receive Ethernet messages. Data
traffic is handled by the client/server procedure.
Setting Description
Connection configuration Activates general data transfer.
Access Activates data transfer between specific nodes.
IP Address Defines the node for the Ethernet Messaging procedure.
Access Control Activates or deactivates control of remote devices that are
attempting to open a TCP connection to the module.
Messaging Tab
The following procedure shows how to access the Messaging page:
Step Action
1 In the Control Expert project browser, go to the Structural view. Expand (+) the
Communication folder until you locate the name of the Ethernet logical network
associated with the module.
2 Right click the Ethernet logical network and select Open.
Result: The module configuration screen appears.
3 Select the Messaging tab. (See the illustration below.)
33002479 10/2019 109

The Messaging tab is shown below.
Configuration parameters can be accessed in two areas on the Messaging tab screen:
 the Connection Configuration area
 the Access Control area
Connection Configuration Area

The Connection Configuration area is used to:
 activate an access control utility
 list the remote devices that can connect to the module according to a communication protocol
110 33002479 10/2019

Access Control
The Access Control box is used to activate or deactivate control of remote devices that are
attempting to open a TCP connection to the module. The functionality depends on whether the box
is checked or not:
 checked: Access control management is activated and the Access column of the table is active
(no longer grayed out).
 The module can only communicate to the addresses entered in the 128 available spaces in
the Slave IP Address column.
 With the module in client mode it can only connect to remote devices selected by the Access
column in the Connection Configuration table.
 unchecked: Access control management is inoperative and the Access column of the table is
not active (grayed out).
 With the module in server mode, remote third-party devices can connect as clients (before
communication with the module) without being declared in the table.
NOTE: Access control is only effective on the TCP/IP profile and assists module operations in
server and client mode.
33002479 10/2019 111

Section 3.4
Selecting the Ethernet Coprocessor
Selecting the Ethernet Coprocessor
Introduction
This section describes configuring the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert coprocessor, 140
CPU 651 x0.

Topic Page
Selecting the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Controller 113
Configuring the IP Address of the Ethernet Controller 115
Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Controller Messaging Configuration 116
112 33002479 10/2019

Selecting the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Controller
General Description
After configuring Ethernet communication (see page 95), the Ethernet module parameters can be
configured.
When you select the model family, all the corresponding communication-module configuration
options display automatically. The module services allow the following settings to be made:
Setting Description
No Setting deactivated.
Yes Setting activated. Parameters are set using the Control Expert menu window.
NOTE: The availability of the displayed settings varies and depends on the selected model family.
The screen shot shows an example of the menu window of the Ethernet module CPU 651 x0
(TCP/IP 10/100 Extended connection).
Model Family Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet module settings.
Module Address Not used.
Module Utilities For module service configuration options, see above.
Module IP Address Overview of the IP address parameter set.
33002479 10/2019 113

After selecting the model family TCP/IP 10/100 Extended Connection, the following mask appears.
The image also displays the activated module services.
NOTE: The availability of the displayed register depends on the selected model family and can
vary.
After selecting the Yes option in module services, the tab corresponding to the module is activated.
114 33002479 10/2019

Configuring the IP Address of the Ethernet Controller
General Description
The IP configuration tab enables you to configure the IP address settings. The settings are
activated after the connection to the hardware and the configuration is downloaded to the Modicon
Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet controller, 140 CPU 651 x0.
The diagram shows the IP configuration for the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet
controller, 140 CPU 651 x0.
Description of the selection properties
Selection Description
Configured Activate the IP address, Subnet mask and Gateway address. The data is activated
after the configuration is downloaded to the controller.
Client / Server The Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet controller receives its IP address
parameter through a BOOTP server on startup.
33002479 10/2019 115

Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Controller Messaging Configuration
Introduction
Use the Messaging tab in Control Expert to send and receive messages via Ethernet. The data
traffic is handled by the client / server procedure.
The following illustration shows the Messaging dialog box.
Setting Description
Connection configuration Activates general data transfer.
Access Activates data transfer between specific nodes.
IP address Defines the node for the Ethernet messaging procedure.
Access Control Activates or deactivates control of remote devices that are
attempting to open a TCP connection to the module.
116 33002479 10/2019

Using Ethernet Services
33002479 10/2019
Part III
Using the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Services
Using the Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet

Services
Purpose
This part describes how to use the Ethernet services available on Modicon Quantum with Control
Expert Ethernet modules.
What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
4 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks 119
5 Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Utility 185
6 I/O Scanner 199
7 Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement 237
8 Network Management Service (SNMP) 247
9 NTP Time Synchronization Service 263
10 Electronic Mail Notification Service 275
11 Embedded Web Pages 283
12 Hot Standby 325
33002479 10/2019 117

Using Ethernet Services
118 33002479 10/2019

Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 4
Introduction
This chapter describes how to transfer data to and from nodes on a TCP/IP network using
communication blocks. You transfer the data using either a special MBP_MSTR instruction or an
IEC Logic function. Operational statistics and error codes for reading and writing the controller
information are included.

Section Topic Page
4.1 IEC Data Transfer Functions 120
4.2 MBP_MSTR 135
33002479 10/2019 119

Section 4.1
IEC Data Transfer Functions
IEC Data Transfer Functions
Overview
This section describes several IEC function blocks that manage data transfer to and from nodes
on a TCP/IP network.

Topic Page
CREAD_REG 121
CWRITE_REG 124
READ_REG 127
WRITE_REG 130
TCP_IP_ADDR 133
120 33002479 10/2019

CREAD_REG
Function Description
The CREAD_REG block reads register data continuously from an addressed node via TCP/IP-
Ethernet.
EN and ENO can be projected as additional parameters.
NOTE: About this function block:
 When programming this function, you must be familiar with the routing procedures used by your
network.
 For technical reasons, this function block does not allow the use of ST and IL programming
languages.
Representation
Block representation:
Description of parameters:
Parameter Data Type Meaning

SLAVEREG DINT offset address of the first %MW word (4x register) in the slave
to be read from
NO_REG INT number of registers to be read from slave
AddrFld WordArr5 data structure describing the TCI/IP address
REG_READ WORD first %MW word (4x register) for read values
STATUS WORD error code
33002479 10/2019 121

Elementary Description for WordArr5 with TCP/IP Ethernet

Elementary description for WordArr5 with TCP/IP Ethernet:
Element Data Type Meaning

WordArr5[1] WORD Low value byte: MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET)
mapping index
High value byte: Slot of the NOE module
WordArr5[2] WORD Byte 4 (MSB) of the 32-bit destination IP address
WordArr5[3] WORD Byte 3 of the 32-bit destination IP address
WordArr5[4] WORD Byte 2 of the 32-bit destination IP address
WordArr5[5] WORD Byte 1 (LSB) of the 32-bit destination IP address
Function Mode of the CREAD_REG Block

CREAD_REG, CWRITE_REG, READ_REG, WRITE_REG, and MBP_MSTR function blocks use one data
transaction path and require multiple cycles to complete an operation. The number of transaction
paths available by module and by MAST cycle depends on the communication port used:
 Modbus Plus embedded port or NOM modules support up to 4 blocks at the same time.
 TCP/IP Ethernet embedded port support up to 4 blocks at the same time.
 TCP/IP Ethernet NOE, NOC, and 140 CRP 312 00 modules support up to 16 blocks at the same
time.
More communication function blocks may be programmed on the same communication port.
However, a communication block exceeding the maximum number on that port is not serviced until
one of the transaction paths is available. Then, the next block on the same port becomes active
and begins using an available path.
NOTE: A TCP/IP communication between a Quantum PLC (NOE 771 ••) and a Momentum PLC
(all TCP/IP CPUs and all TCP/IP I/O modules) is only possible, when only one read or write job is
carried out in every cycle. If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle, the communication stops without
generating an error message in the status register of the function block.
NOTE: A TCP/IP communication between a Quantum PLC (NOE 211 00) and a Momentum PLC
The entire routing information is contained in data structure WordArr5 of input AddrFld. The type
of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depends on the
network used.
Please use:
 TCP/IP Ethernet: the function block TCP_IP_ADDR
NOTE: For experts: The WordArr5 data structure can be used with constants as well.
122 33002479 10/2019

NOTE: This function block puts a heavy load on the network; therefore the network load must be
carefully monitored. If the network load is too high, the program logic should be reorganized in
order to work with the READ_REG function block, a variation of this function block that does not
operate in a continuous mode, but under command control.
SLAVEREG
SLAVEREG is the start of the area in the addressed slave from which the source data is read. The
source area always resides within the %MW word (4x register) area. SLAVEREG expects the
source reference as offset within that area. (In 4x registers, the leading "4" must be omitted. For
example, "59" (contents of the variables or value of the literal) = 40059).
The parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable, unlocated variable, or literal.
NO_REG
NO_REG is the number of registers to be read from the addressed slave (1 ... 100). The parameter
can be entered as a direct address, located variable, unlocated variable, or literal.
REG_READ
The REG_READ word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_REG registers,
listed one after the other, which are used as a destination data area. The parameter must be
entered as a direct address or located variable.
STATUS
Error code, see Runtime errors.
The STATUS parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable, or unlocated
variable.
33002479 10/2019 123

CWRITE_REG
The CWRITE_REG block writes data to a register area continuously, transferring data from the
PLC via TCP/IP Ethernet to an addressed slave.
EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters.
network.
languages.
Symbol

SLAVEREG DINT offset address of the first %MW word (4x register) in the
slave to be written to
NO_REG INT number of registers to be written to slave
REG_WRIT WORD first %MW word (4x register) of the source data area
AddrFld WordArr5 data structure for transferring the TCI/IP address
STATUS WORD MBP_MSTR error code
124 33002479 10/2019



WordArr5[1] WORD low value byte: MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET)
mapping index
high value byte: slots of the NOE module
WordArr5[2] WORD byte 4 (MSB) of the 32-bit destination IP address
WordArr5[3] WORD byte 3 of the 32-bit destination IP address
WordArr5[5] WORD byte 1 (LSB) of the 32-bit destination IP address
CWRITE_REG Block Function Mode

time.
If several CWRITE_REG function blocks are used within an application, they must at least differ in
the values of their NO_REG or REG_WRITE parameters.
NOTE: A TCP/IP communication between a Quantum PLC (NOE 771xx) and a Momentum PLC
of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depend on the
network used.
Please use:
NOTE: For experts: The WordArr5 data structure can also be used with constants.
NOTE: This function block puts a heavy load on the network. The network load must therefore be
carefully monitored. If the network load is too high, the program logic should be reorganized to work
with the WRITE_REG function block, which is a variant of this function block that does not operate
in continuous mode but is command driven.
33002479 10/2019 125

SLAVEREG
SLAVEREG is the start of the area in the addressed slave to which the source data are written.
The destination area always resides within the %MW word (4x register) area. SLAVEREG expects
the destination address as offset within that area. In 4x registers, the leading 4 must be omitted.
For example, 59 (contents of the variables or value of the literal) = 40059.
NO_REG
NO_REG is the number of registers to be written to slave processor (1...100). The parameter can
be specified as direct address, located variable, unlocated variable, or literal.
STATUS
The STATUS parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable or unlocated variable.
REG_WRIT
The REG_WRIT word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_REG Successive
registers used as source data area.
The parameter must be entered as a direct address or located variable.
126 33002479 10/2019

READ_REG
Upon request, the READ_REG block reads a register area once (rising edge of the REQ input). It
reads data from an addressed slave via TCP/IP Ethernet.
network.
languages.
Symbol
Description of block parameters:

REQ BOOL start read operation once
SLAVEREG DINT offset address of the first %MW word (4x register) in the slave
to be read from
NO_REG INT number of registers to be read from slave
AddrFld WordArr5 data structure describing the TCP/IP address
NDR BOOL set to 1 for one cycle after reading new data
ERROR BOOL set to 1 for one scan in case of error
REG_READ WORD first %MW word (4x register) for read values
33002479 10/2019 127



WordArr5[1] WORD low value byte: MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping
index
high value byte: Slot of the NOE module
Function Mode of READ_REG Blocks

time.
(all TCP/IP CPUs and all TCP/IP I/O modules) is possible only when 1 read or write job is carried
out in every cycle. If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle, the communication stops without
of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depends on the
network used.
Please use:
NOTE: For experts: The WordArr5 data structure can be used with constants as well.
REQ
A rising edge triggers the read transaction.
The REQ parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable, unlocated variable, or
Literal.
128 33002479 10/2019

SLAVEREG
source reference as offset within that area. In 4x registers, the leading 4 must be omitted. For
example, 59 (contents of the variables or value of the literal) = 40059.
NO_REG
Number of registers to be read from the addressed slave (1 ... 100).
The NO_REG parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable, unlocated variable,
or literal.
NDR
Transition to ON state for one program cycle signifies receipt of new data ready to be processed.
The NDR parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable, or unlocated variable.
ERROR
Transition to ON state for one program cycle signifies detection of a new error.
The ERROR parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable, or unlocated variable.
REG_READ
This word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_REG registers lying in series
used as destination data area.
The REG_READ parameter must be entered as a direct address or located variable.
STATUS
The STATUS parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable or unlocated variable.
33002479 10/2019 129

WRITE_REG
Upon request, the WRITE_REG block writes a register area once (rising edge of the REQ input).
It transfers data from the PLC via TCP/IP Ethernet to an addressed slave.
network.
languages.
Symbol

REQ BOOL start write operation once
SLAVEREG DINT offset address of the first %MW word (4x register) in the
slave to be written to
NO_REG INT number of registers to be written from slave
AddrFld WordArr5 data structure transferring the TCP/IP address
REG_WRIT WORD first %MW word (4x register) of the source data area
DONE BOOL set to "1" for one scan after writing data
ERROR BOOL set to "1" for one scan in case of error
130 33002479 10/2019



WordArr5[1] WORD high value byte: Slot of the NOE module
low value byte: MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET)
mapping index
Function Mode of the WRITE_REG Module

time.
If several WRITE_REG function blocks are used within an application, they must at least differ in
the values of their NO_REG or REG_WRITE parameters.
(all TCP/IP CPUs and all TCP/IP I/O modules) is possible only when one read or write job is carried
out in every cycle. If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle, the communication stops without
The status signals DONE and ERROR report the function block state to the user program.
of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depend on the
network used.
Please use:
NOTE: For experts: The WordArr5 data structure can also be used with constants.
33002479 10/2019 131

REQ
A rising edge triggers the read transaction.
The REQ parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable or unlocated variable.
SLAVEREG
source reference as offset within that area. In 4x registers, the leading 4 must be omitted. For
example, 59 (contents of the variables or value of the literal) = 40059.
NO_REG
Number of registers to be read from the addressed slave (1...100).
REG_WRIT
The REG_WRIT word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_REG registers used
as source data area.
The parameter must be entered as a direct address or located variable.
DONE
Transition to ON state for one program scan signifies data have been transferred.
The DONE parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable or unlocated variable.
ERROR
Transition to ON state for one program scan signifies detection of a new error.
The parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable or unlocated variable.
STATUS
The parameter can be specified as direct address, located variable, or unlocated variable.
132 33002479 10/2019

TCP_IP_ADDR
The TCP_IP_ADDR block enables the input of TCP/IP addresses for the READ_REG
(see page 127), CREAD_REG (see page 121), WRITE_REG (see page 130), and CWRITE_REG
(see page 124) blocks. The address is transferred in the form of a data structure.
NOTE: When programming the TCP_IP_ADDR function, you must be familiar with your network’s
routing procedures.
Symbol

Map_Idx BYTE Map-Index
MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping index
Slot_ID BYTE slot ID
slot of the NOE module
Ip_B4 BYTE byte 4 (MSB) of the 32-bit destination IP address
Ip_B3 BYTE byte 3 of the 32-bit destination IP address
Ip_B2 BYTE byte 2 of the 32-bit destination IP address
Ip_B1 BYTE byte 1 (LSB) of the 32-bit destination IP address
AddrFld WordArr5 data structure used to transfer the TCP/IP address
33002479 10/2019 133

Elementary Description for WordArr5

Elementary description for WordArr5:

WordArr5[1] WORD high value byte: Slot of the NOE module
low value byte: MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET)
mapping index
Map_Idx
The MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping index is given at the Map_Idx input. That is, if
MET is 6, the value appears as follows:
Slot_ID
If an NOE in the rack of a Quantum controller is addressed as destination node, the value at the
Slot_ID input represents the physical NOE slot. That is, if the NOE is plugged in at Slot 7 of the
rack, the value appears as follows:
NOTE: When using an integrated Ethernet CPU module such as the 140 CPU 651 x0, the slot ID
must be 254 (FE hex) regardless of the CPU slot.
AddrFld
If an NOE in the rack of a Quantum controller is addressed as a destination node, the value in the
High value byte represents the physical slot of the NOE and the Low value byte represents the
MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping index. That is, if the NOE is inserted in slot 7 of the
rack and the MET mapping index is 6, the first element of the data structure looks as follows:
High value byte Slots 1 ... 16

Low value byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping index
134 33002479 10/2019

Section 4.2
MBP_MSTR
MBP_MSTR
Overview
This section describes the 14 different communication function provided in the MBP_MSTR
function block.

Topic Page
Block Description 136
Operational Function Codes 139
Network Control Block Structures 140
Modbus Plus, SY/MAX, and Ethernet TCP/IP Error Codes 143
CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet 147
SY/MAX-Specific Error Codes 148
Read Data 150
Write Data 152
Get Local Statistics 154
Clear Local Statistics 155
Get Remote Statistics 156
Clear Remote Statistics 158
TCP/IP Ethernet Network Statistics 159
TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes 162
Reset Optional Module 166
Read CTE 167
Write CTE 169
Send Email 171
Send Modbus Request 173
Close Connection Request 178
Change Modbus Plus Address 179
Read/Write Data 181
Enable / Disable HTTP or FTP/TFTP Services 182
33002479 10/2019 135

Block Description
You can select one of 14 available network communication operations (see page 139) using the
MBP_MSTR function block.
The MBP_MSTR block is supported on various hardware platforms (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Communication, Block Library).
NOTE: Verify that the programmer is familiar with the routing procedures of your network when
programming an MBP_MSTR function block. Modbus Plus routing path structures are described in
detail in the communication architectures manual (see Communication Services and
Architectures, Reference Manual) and the Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide.
If TCP/IP or SY/MAX Ethernet routing is implemented (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™Control
Expert, TCP/IP Configuration, User Manual), use standard EtherNet IP router products.
time.
NOTE: In FBD and LD sections, this function block can be used on the program level and with
derived function blocks (DFBs). When using DFBs, verify that the parameters CONTROL and
DATABUF are directly connected to the I/O pins of the DFB.
NOTE: A TCP/IP communication between a Quantum PLC and a Momentum PLC is only possible
when one read or write job is carried out in every cycle. If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle, the
communication stops without generating a detected error message in the status register of the
function block.
NOTE: In Quantum or Premium Hot Standby, to help prevent the former standby CPU from
executing communication functions (now in RUN offline state), add a condition on the status bits
to disable the function if the CPU is offline.
Example:
 You can send MBP_MSTR.Enable:=(HSBY_NOEPLCMSTR_ON) AND (%SW61.1) AND NOT
(%SW61.0)
or
 You can create a boolean variable, primary_state:=(%SW61.1) AND NOT (%SW61.0), and
insert it for executing the section
136 33002479 10/2019

NOTE: In M580 Hot Standby, to help prevent the former standby CPU from executing
communication functions (now in RUN offline state), add a condition on the status bits to disable
the function if the CPU is offline.
Example:
 You can set MBP_MSTR.Enable:=(HSBY_NOEPLCMSTR_ON AND
ECPU_HSBY_1.LOCAL_HSBY_STS.RUN_PRIMARY)
or
 Use the boolean variable ECPU_HSBY_1.LOCAL_HSBY_STS.RUN_PRIMARY as condition
for executing the section
NOTE: Several copies of this function block can be used in the program. However, multiple
instancing of these copies is not possible.
Representation in FBD
Representation in LD
33002479 10/2019 137

Input Parameters
Parameter Data Type Description

ENABLE BOOL When ON, the operation specified in the first element of the CONTROL register
is enabled.
ABORT BOOL When ON, the currently active operation (see page 139) is aborted.
Output Parameters

ACTIVE BOOL ON when the operation is active.
ERROR BOOL ON when the operation is aborted without success.
SUCCESS BOOL ON when the operation concludes successfully.
CONTROL WORD This field contains the control block. The first element CONTROL[1] contains
the number of the operation code of the operation to be performed
(see page 139). The content of the sequence register is determined by the
operation.
Verify that the data field is declared as a located variable.
The structure of the control block differs according to the network used
(see page 140).
DATABUF WORD For operations providing data (for example a write operation) the data field
is the data source. For operations receiving data (for example a read
operation) the data field is the data destination.
With Ethernet CTE read and write operations, the data field holds the
contents of the Ethernet configuration extension table. Verify that DATABUF
is defined as an array of at least 10 elements in this case.
Verify that the data field is declared as a located variable.
Runtime Error
In the event of a detected error occurring during an MBP_MSTR operation, a hexadecimal error code
is displayed in the CONTROL[2] register of the control block for one cycle.
NOTE: Function error codes (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library)
are network-specific.
NOTE: For a list of all block error codes and values, refer to the tables of error codes for the
communication library (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Communication, Block Library).
138 33002479 10/2019

Operational Function Codes
Valid MBP_MSTR Function Codes

Using the MBP_MSTR block, network communication operations can be triggered via the network.
As shown in the following table, each operation has a function code assigned to it. The availability
of specific operations depends on both the type of network and the type of module you are using.
Function Operation Modbus Plus TCP/IP SY/MAX CIP Ethernet

Code Ethernet Ethernet
1 Write data X X X -
2 Read data X X X -
3 Get local statistics X X - -
4 Clear local statistics X X - -
5 Write global data, peer cop X - - -
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Communication, Block Library)
6 Read global data, peer cop X - - -
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Communication, Block Library)
7 Get remote statistics X X - -
8 Clear remote statistics (see page 158) X X - -
9 Peer cop health status (see EcoStruxure™ X - - -
Control Expert, Communication, Block
Library)
10 Reset optional module - X X -
11 Read CTE (Config extension) - X X -
12 Write CTE (Config extension) - X X -
13 Send E-mail (see page 171) - X - -
14 CIP Explicit message - - - X
15 Send Modbus Request (see page 173) - X - -
16 Close Connection Request (see page 178) - X - -
17 Change Modbus Plus Address X - - -
(see page 179)
23 Read / write data (see page 181) - X - -
65520 (dec) Enable / disable HTTP or FTP/TFTP - X - -
FFF0 (hex)
where:
 X indicates Yes
 - indicates No
33002479 10/2019 139

Network Control Block Structures
Summary
The structure of the MBP_MSTR control block varies according to the type of network you are using.
Structures for Modbus Plus, TCP/IP Ethernet, and SyMax Ethernet are described below.
Control Block for Modbus Plus
Register Contents
CONTROL[1] Indicates an operation that is valid for Modbus Plus
CONTROL[2] Indicates the error status
CONTROL[3] Indicates the length, i.e., the number of data units transferred (max. 100)
CONTROL[4] Indicates MSTR operation-dependent information
CONTROL[5] Routing register 1: used to specify a destination node during network
transfer (routing path addresses one of five)
Most significant byte: source node address, i.e., the slot for the Modbus
Plus Network Options Module (NOM)
When using the Modbus Plus Port on the CPU, this byte must be set to 0
(regardless of the CPU slot).
Least significant byte: destination node address, i.e., a value that
represents a direct or a bridge address. If there is no bridge, this value
contains the destination node address. If there is a bridge, this value
contains the address of the bridge.
If the NOM is inserted in slot 7 on the module rack, the most significant byte
of routing register 1 looks as follows (value 0x0706):
Most significant byte Slots 1 ... 16

Least significant byte Destination address (binary value between 1 and 64
(normal) or 65 to 255 (extended))
CONTROL[6] Routing register 2, the destination node address (further bridge or Modbus
Plus modules). If addressing in the previous routing register has finished,
the value is set to 0.
CONTROL[7] Routing register 3, similar to routing register 2
CONTROL[8] Routing register 4, similar to routing register 2 (see Routing Register 2)
CONTROL[9] Routing register 5, similar to routing register 2 (see Routing Register 2)
140 33002479 10/2019

Control Block for TCP/IP Ethernet
Register Contents
CONTROL[1] Indicates an operation that is valid for TCP/IP
CONTROL[3] Indicates the length, i.e., the number of data units transferred (max. 100)
CONTROL[5] Routing register: used to specify a destination node during network transfer
Most significant byte: source node address, i.e., the NOE slot for the NOE
module
When using an integrated Ethernet on the CPU, this byte must be set to
254 (FE hex) regardless of the CPU slot.
Least significant byte: destination node address, i.e, a value that
represents a direct or bridge address. If there is no bridge the value in the
least significant byte is set to 0. If there is a bridge, this value contains the
MBP for the Ethernet mapping index (MET).
If the NOE is inserted in slot 7 on the module rack and the Ethernet
mapping index (MET) is 6, the routing register looks as follows (value
0x0706):

Least significant byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping index
CONTROL[6] Byte 4, MSB of the 32-bit destination IP address
CONTROL[7] Byte 3 of the 32-bit destination IP address
CONTROL[8] Byte 2 of the 32-bit destination IP address
CONTROL[9] Byte 1, LSB of the 32-bit destination IP address
NOTE: CONTROL[10] and CONTROL[11] are used when configuring the MBP_MSTR block for a
Read/Write Data operation (function code 23).
33002479 10/2019 141

Control Block for SY/MAX Ethernet
Register Contents
CONTROL[1] Indicates an operation that is valid for SY/MAX
CONTROL[3] Indicates the length, i.e., the number of registers transferred (max. 100)
CONTROL[5] Routing register: used to specify a destination node during network transfer
Most significant byte: source node address, ie.e, the slot for the NOE
module
Least significant byte: destination node address, i.e, a value that
represents a direct or bridge address. If there is no bridge the value in the
least significant byte is set to 0. If there is a bridge, this value contains the
MBP for the Ethernet mapping index (MET).
If NOM is inserted in slot 7 on the module rack and the Ethernet mapping
index (MET) is 6, the routing register looks as follows (value 0x0706):

Least significant byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping index
CONTROL[6] Destination drop number (or set to FF hex)
CONTROL[7] Terminator (set to FF hex)
142 33002479 10/2019

Modbus Plus, SY/MAX, and Ethernet TCP/IP Error Codes
Form of the Function Error Code

Function error codes for Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet transactions appear as Mmss, where:
 M is the high code
 m is the low code
 ss is a subcode
Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet Network Errors

Hexadecimal error codes for Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet:
Hex. Error Code Description

1001 Abort by user
2001 An operation type that is not supported has been specified in the control
block
2002 One or more control block parameters were modified while the MSTR
element was active (this only applies to operations which require several
cycles for completion). Control block parameters my only be modified in
inactive MSTR components.
2003 Invalid value in the length field of the control block
2004 Invalid value in the offset field of the control block
2005 Invalid value in the length and offset fields of the control block
2006 Unauthorized data field on slave
2007 Unauthorized network field on slave
2008 Unauthorized network routing path on slave
2009 Routing path equivalent to their own address
200A Attempt to get more global data words than available
200C Bad pattern for change address request
200D Bad address for change address request
200E The control block is not assigned, or parts of the control block are located
outside of the %MW (4x) range.
30ss Exceptional response by Modbus slave (see page 146)
4001 Inconsistent response by Modbus slave
5001 Inconsistent response by the network
6mss Routing path error (see page 146)
The subfield m shows where the error occurred (a 0 value means local
node, 2 means 2nd device in route, etc).
33002479 10/2019 143

TCP/IP Ethernet Network Errors

Hexadecimal error codes for TCP/IP Ethernet:
Hex. Error Code Meaning

5004 Interrupted system call
5005 I/O error
5006 No such address
5009 Socket descriptor is invalid
500C Not enough memory
500D Permission denied
5011 Entry exists
5016 Argument is invalid
5017 Internal table has run out of space
5020 Connection is broken
5028 Destination address required
5029 Protocol wrong type for socket
502A Protocol not available
502B Protocol not supported
502C Socket type not supported
502D Operation not supported on a socket
502E Protocol family not supported
502F Address family not supported
5030 Address already in use
5031 Cannot assign requested address
5032 Socket operation on a non-socket
5033 Network is unreachable
5034 Network dropped connection on reset
5035 Network caused connection abort
5036 Connection reset by peer
5037 No buffer space available
5038 Socket already connected
5039 Socket not connected
503A Cannot send after socket shutdown
503B Too many references, cannot splice
503C Connection timed out (see note below)
503D Connection refused
144 33002479 10/2019

Hex. Error Code Meaning

503E Network down
503F Text file busy
5040 Too many levels of links
5041 No route to host
5042 Block device required
5043 Host is down
5044 Operation now in progress
5045 Operation already in progress
5046 Operation would block
5047 Function not implemented
5048 Hardware length is invalid
5049 Route specified cannot be found
504A Collision in select call: these conditions have already been selected by
another task
504B Task ID is invalid
5050 No network resource
5051 Length error
5052 Addressing error
5053 Application error
5054 Client in bad state for request
5055 No remote resource -- may indicate no path to remote device (see note
below)
5056 Non-operational TCP connection
5057 Incoherent configuration
NOTE:
 Error code 5055 can occur before a 503C error.
 No remote device takes precedence over a timeout.
33002479 10/2019 145

ss Hexadecimal Value in 30ss Error Code

ss hexadecimal value in 30ss error code:
ss Hex. Value Description

01 Slave does not support requested operation
02 Non-existing slave registers were requested
03 An unauthorized data value was requested
05 Slave has accepted a lengthy program command
06 Function cannot currently be carried out: lengthy command running
07 Slave has rejected lengthy program command
ss Hexadecimal Value in 6mss Error Code

NOTE: Subfield m in error code 6mss is an Index in the routing information that shows where an
error has been detected (a 0 value indicates the local node, 2 means the second device in the
route, etc.).
The ss subfield in error code 6mss is as follows:
ss Hex. Value Description

01 No response reception
02 Access to program denied
03 Node out of service and unable to communicate
04 Unusual response received
05 Router-node data path busy
06 Slave out of order
07 Wrong destination address
08 Unauthorized node type in routing path
10 Slave has rejected the command
20 Slave has lost an activated transaction
40 Unexpected master output path received
80 Unexpected response received
F001 Wrong destination node was specified for the MSTR operation
146 33002479 10/2019

CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet
CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet

The following error codes are displayed in the CONTROL[1] register of the control block, if there is
a problem with the Ethernet configuration extension table (CTE) in your program configuration.
CTE error codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet:
Hex. Error Description

Code
7001 There is no Ethernet configuration extension.
7002 The CTE is not available for access.
7003 The offset is not valid.
7004 Offset + length are not valid.
7005 Bad data field in the CTE.
33002479 10/2019 147

SY/MAX-Specific Error Codes
SY/MAX-Specific Error Codes

When utilizing SY/MAX Ethernet, three additional types of errors may appear in the CONTROL[1]
register of the control block ().
The error codes have the following meaning:
 71xx Error: Errors found by the SY/MAX remote device
 72xx Error: Errors found by the server
 73xx Error: Errors found by the Quantum translator
SY/MAX-Specific Hexadecimal Error Codes

SY/MAX-specific hexadecimal error codes:

Code
7101 Invalid opcode found by the SY/MAX remote device
7103 Invalid address found by the SY/MAX remote device
7109 Attempt to write to a write protected register found by the SY/MAX remote
device
F710 Receiver overflow found by the SY/MAX remote device
7110 Invalid length found by the SY/MAX remote device
7111 Remote device not active, no connection (occurs when retry attempts and
time-out have been used up), found by the SY/MAX remote device
7113 Invalid parameter in a read operation found by the SY/MAX remote device
711D Invalid route found by the SY/MAX remote device
7149 Invalid parameter in a write operation found by the SY/MAX remote device
714B Invalid drop number found by the SY/MAX remote device
7101 Invalid opcode found by the SY/MAX server
7203 Invalid address found by the SY/MAX server
7209 Attempt to write to a write protected register found by the SY/MAX server
F720 Receiver overflow found by the SY/MAX server
7210 Invalid length found by the SY/MAX server
7211 Remote device not active, no connection (occurs when retry attempts and
time-out have been used up), found by the SY/MAX server
7213 Invalid parameter in a read operation found by the SY/MAX server
721D Invalid route found by the SY/MAX server
7249 Invalid parameter in a write operation found by the SY/MAX server
724B Invalid drop number found by the SY/MAX server
148 33002479 10/2019


Code
7301 Invalid opcode in an MSTR block request from the Quantum translator
7303 Read/Write QSE module status (200 route address out of range)
7309 Attempt to write to a write protected register when a status write is carried
out (200 route)
731D Invalid route found by the Quantum translator.
Valid routes:
 dest_drop, 0xFF
 200, dest_drop, 0xFF
 100+drop, dest_drop, 0xFF
 All other routing values produce an error
734B One of the following errors occurred:

 No CTE (configuration extension table) has been configured
 No CTE table entry has been made for the QSE model slot number
 No valid drop has been specified
 The QSE module has not been reset after the creation of the CTE.
Note: After writing and configuring the CTE and downloading to the QSE
module, the QSE module must be reset for the modifications to become
effective.
 When using an MSTR instruction no valid slot or drop has been specified
33002479 10/2019 149

Read Data
Description
A read operation transfers data from a specified slave source device to a master destination device
on the network. The operation uses a master transaction path, and may require several cycles to
complete. To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a write operation, use function code 2
(see page 139).
NOTE: Do not attempt to program an MBP_MSTR to read to its own station address. This action
causes the function block to generate an error in the CONTROL[2] register of the control block
(see page 140).
You can perform a read operation on a nonexistent slave register. The slave detects and logs the
status, which can last for several cycles.
NOTE: For Quantum PLC communication with a Premium/Atrium PLC, confirm that the addressing
is made with an offset of 1. In order to access an address object n of a Premium PLC, confirm that
the communication function of the Quantum PLC uses the n+1 address. IEC addressing starts at
0, and Modbus addressing starts at 1.
Network Implementation
The read operation can be performed on Modbus Plus, TCP/IP Ethernet, and SY/MAX Ethernet
networks.
Control Block Usage for Modbus Plus
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 2 = read data
CONTROL[2] Indicates the error status.
CONTROL[3] Number of registers to be read from the slave.
CONTROL[4] Determines the %MW starting register in the slave from which the data is read, e.g.,
1 = %MW1, 49 = %MW49.
CONTROL[5] Routing register 1 is used to specify the address (routing path address 1 of 5) of the node
... during a network transfer.
CONTROL[9] The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination node.
150 33002479 10/2019

Control Block Usage for TCP/IP Ethernet
Register Meaning
CONTROL[3] Number of addresses to be read from the slave.
CONTROL[4] Determines the %MW starting register in the slave from which the data is read,
e.g., 1 = %MW1, 49 = %MW49.
CONTROL[5] Routing register
 most significant byte: network adapter module slot
 least significant byte: MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping index
CONTROL[6] Each address contains 1 byte of the 32-bit IP address, where the MSB is in
... CONTROL[6] and the LSB is in CONTROL[9].
CONTROL[9]
Control Block Usage for SY/MAX Ethernet
Register Meaning
CONTROL[3] Number of addresses to be read from the slave.
CONTROL[4] Determines the %MW starting register in the slave to which the data is written,
e.g., 1 = %MW1, 49 = %MW49.
CONTROL[5] Routing register:
 least significant byte: destination drop number
CONTROL[6] terminator: FF hex

...
CONTROL[9]
33002479 10/2019 151

Write Data
Description
A write operation transfers data from a master source device to a specified slave destination device
on the network. The operation uses a master transaction path, and may require several cycles to
complete. To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a write operation, use function code 1
(see page 139).
NOTE: Do not attempt to program an MBP_MSTR to write to its own drop address. This action
causes the function block to generate an error in the CONTROL[2] register of the control block
(see page 140).
You can perform a write operation to a nonexistent slave register. The slave detects and logs the
status, which can last for several cycles.
NOTE: For Quantum PLC communication with a Premium/Atrium PLC, confirm that the addressing
is made with an offset of 1. In order to access an address object n of a Premium PLC, confirm that
the communication function of the Quantum PLC uses the n+1 address. IEC addressing starts at
0, and Modbus addressing starts at 1.
The write operation can be performed on Modbus Plus, TCP/IP Ethernet, and SY/MAX Ethernet
networks.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 1 = write data
CONTROL[3] Number of addresses sent to the slave.
e.g. 1 = %MW1, 49 = %MW49.
CONTROL[5] Routing register 1 is used to specify the address (routing path address 1 of 5) of
... the node during a network transfer.
CONTROL[9] The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination node.
152 33002479 10/2019

Register Meaning
CONTROL[4] Determines the %MW start address of the slave to which the data is written.
 least significant byte: MBP on Ethernet transporter (MET) mapping index
CONTROL[6] Each address contains 1 byte of the 32-bit IP address.

...
CONTROL[9]
Register Meaning
e.g., 1 = %MW1, 49 = %MW49.
 least significant byte: destination drop number
CONTROL[6] terminator: FF hex

...
CONTROL[9]
33002479 10/2019 153

Get Local Statistics
Description
A Get Local Statistics operation reads the data from the local node in one cycle and does
not require a master transaction path.To program an MBP_MSTR block to
Get Local Statistics, use function code 3 (see page 139).
A Get Local Statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet
networks (see page 159).
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 3 = get local statistics
CONTROL[3] Number of addresses to be read from local statistics (1 ... 54)
Note: The size of databuf must be at least the size of this entry.
CONTROL[4] First address from which the statistics table must be read (Reg1=0)
CONTROL[5] Routing register 1 is used to specify the address (routing path address 1 of
5) of the node during a network transfer.
The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination mode.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 3 = get local statistics
CONTROL[3] Number of addresses to be read from local statistics (1 ... 38)
Note: The size of databuf must be the size of this entry.
CONTROL[4] First address from which the statistics table must be read (Reg1=0)
Most significant byte: Network adapter module slot
CONTROL[6] Not used
...
CONTROL[9]
154 33002479 10/2019

Clear Local Statistics
Description
A clear local statistics operation clears the values from words 13 ... 22 in the statistics table of the
local node. The operation is carried out in one cycle and does not require a master transaction
path. To program an MBP_MSTR block to clear local statistics, use function code 4 (see page 139).
A clear local statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet networks
(see page 159).
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 4 = clear local statistics
CONTROL[3] Reserved
CONTROL[4] Reserved
5) of the node during a network transfer.
The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination mode.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 4 = clear local statistics
CONTROL[3] Reserved
CONTROL[4] Reserved
Most significant byte: network adapter module slot
CONTROL[6] Reserved
...
CONTROL[9]
33002479 10/2019 155

Get Remote Statistics
Description
A get remote statistics operation can be used to read data from remote nodes on the network. With
each query, the remote communications processor supplies a complete table of statistics even if
the query does not refer to the entire table. It then copies only the words that you queried into
identified $MW addresses.
An operation can take several cycles to complete; it does not require a master data transaction
path. To program an MBP_MSTR block to get remote statistics, use function code 7 (see page 139).
A get remote statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet
networks.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 7 = get remote statistics
CONTROL[3] Number of addresses to be read from the statistics data field (1 ... 54).
CONTROL[4] First address from which the node statistics must be read. The number of
available statistics registers cannot be exceeded.
CONTROL[5] Routing address 1 ... 5 of the node.
... The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination node.
CONTROL[9]
156 33002479 10/2019

Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 7 = get remote statistics
CONTROL[3] Number of addresses to be read from the statistics data field (1 ... 38).
CONTROL[4] First address from which the node statistics must be read. The number of
available statistics registers cannot be exceeded.
CONTROL[6] Each address contains 1 byte of the 32-bit IP address, where the value in
... CONTROL[6] is the MSB and the value in CONTROL[9] is the LSB.
CONTROL[9]
33002479 10/2019 157

Clear Remote Statistics
Description
A clear remote statistics operation clears remote-node values from words 13 ... 22 in the statistics
table of the local node. It uses a master transaction path and may require several cycles to
complete. To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a clear remote statistics operation, use
function code 8 (see page 139).
A clear remote statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet
networks (see page 159).
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 8 = clear remote statistics
CONTROL[3] Reserved
CONTROL[4] Reserved
... 5) of the destination node during a network transfer.
CONTROL[9] The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination mode.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 8 = clear remote statistics
CONTROL[3] Reserved
CONTROL[4] Reserved
CONTROL[5] Routing Register
CONTROL[6] Each address contains one byte of the 32-bit IP address, where the MSB
... is in CONTROL[6] and the LSB is in CONTROL[9].
CONTROL[9]
158 33002479 10/2019

TCP/IP Ethernet Network Statistics
TCP/IP Ethernet Network Statistics

A TCP/IP Ethernet module replies to local and remote statistics commands from the MBP_MSTR
block with the the contents of the databuf array (see the information in the table below):
Word Meaning
00 to 02 MAC address Word Contents
e.g. MAC address 00 00 54 00 12 34 is 00 00 00
displayed as follows: 01 54 00
02 12 34
03 Board status (refer to the following table)
04 and 05 Number of receiver interrupts
06 and 07 Number of transfer interrupts
08 and 09 Transfer timeout error count
10 and 11 Collision detection error count
12 and 13 Omitted packets
14 and 15 Memory error count
16 and 17 Number of restarts performed by the driver
18 and 19 Receive framing error count
20 and 21 Overflow error count receiver
22 and 23 Receive CRC error counter
24 and 25 Receive buffer error counter
26 and 27 Transfer buffer error counter
28 and 29 Transfer bin underflow counter
30 and 31 Late collision counter
32 and 33 Lost carrier counter
34 and 35 Number of retries
36 and 37 IP address Word Contents
e.g. the IP address 198.202.137.113 (or 36 89 71
C6 CA 89 71) is represented as follows: 37 C6 CA
33002479 10/2019 159

Board Status Word Bit Definition

NOTE: It is best to view the board status word in binary format.
The following table describes the bit definitions of the board status word:
 140 NOE 771 x1, versions 2.0, 3.0, 3.1, 3.3 and 3.6 or higher
 140 NOE 771 x0, versions 3.0, 3.3 and 3.4 or higher
Bit # Definition
15 0 = Link LED off 1 = Link LED on
14 0 = Appl LED off 1 = Appl LED on
13 0 = twisted pair 1 = fiber
12 0 = 10 Mbit 1 = 100 Mbit
11 ... 8 (Reserved)
7 ... 4 Module type (see table, below)
3 (Reserved)
2 0 = half duplex 1 = full duplex
1 0 = not configured 1 = configured
0 0 = not running 1 = running
NOTE: Bits are numbered from right to left, starting with bit 0 (low bit). For example, PLC running
= 0000 0000 0000 0001 and LED connection = 1000 0000 0000 0000.
The following table describes the word bit definitions for board status for the:
 140 NOE 771 x1, version 3.5
 140 NOE 771 x0, versions 1.02 and 2.0
 140 CPU 651 x0
Bit # Definition
15 ... 12 Module type (see table below)
11 (Reserved)
10 0 = half duplex 1 = full duplex
9 0 = not configured 1 = configured
8 0 = PLC not running 1 = PLC/NOE running
7 0 = Link LED off 1 = Link LED on
6 0 = Appl LED off 1 = Appl LED on
5 0 = twisted pair 1 = fiber
4 0 = 10 Mbit 1 = 100 Mbit
3 ... 0 (Reserved)
160 33002479 10/2019

NOTE: Bits are counted from right to left, starting with bit 0 (low bit). For example, PLC running =
0x0100, Application LED = 0x0040, and LED Connection = 0x0080.
Board Status Word Bit Definition by Module Type

The following table describes the values of the module types:
Value of Bits 7...4 or 15...12 Module Type

Note: See the previous tables for the bit range that applies to
your module’s software version.
0 NOE 2x1
1 ENT
2 M1E
3 NOE 771 00
4 ETY
5 CIP
6 (reserved)
7 140 CPU 651 x0
8 (reserved)
9 (reserved)
10 NOE 771 10
11 NOE 771 01
12 NOE 771 11
13 ... 15 (reserved)
33002479 10/2019 161

TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes
TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes

An error in an MSTR routine via TCP/IP Ethernet may produce one of the following errors in the
MSTR control block:
The error code appears as Mmss, where:
 M is the high code
 m is the low code
 ss is a subcode
Hexadecimal Error Codes TCP/IP Ethernet

Hexadecimal error codes TCP/IP Ethernet:
Hex. Error Meaning

Code
1001 Abort by user
2001 An operation type that is not supported has been specified in the control
block
2002 One or more control block parameters were modified while the MSTR
element was active (this only applies to operations which require several
cycles for completion). Control block parameters my only be modified in
inactive MSTR components.
2003 Invalid value in the length field of the control block
2004 Invalid value in the offset field of the control block
2005 Invalid value in the length and offset fields of the control block
2006 Unauthorized data field on slave
2008 Unauthorized network routing path on slave
200E The control block is not assigned, or parts of the control block are located
outside of the %MW (4x) range.
3000 Generic Modbus failure code
30ss Exceptional response by Modbus slave (see page 163)
4001 Inconsistent response by Modbus slave
162 33002479 10/2019

ss Hexadecimal Value in 30ss Error Code

ss hexadecimal value in 30ss error code:
ss hex. Value Meaning

01 Slave does not support requested operation
02 Non-existing slave registers were requested
03 An unauthorized data value was requested
05 Slave has accepted a lengthy program command
06 Function cannot currently be carried out: lengthy command running
07 Slave has rejected lengthy program command
Hexadecimal Error Codes TCP/IP Ethernet Network

An error on the TCP/IP Ethernet network itself may produce one of the following errors in the
CONTROL[1] register of the control block.
Hexadecimal error codes TCP/IP Ethernet network:
Hex. Error Meaning

Code
5004 Interrupted system invocation
5005 I/O error
5006 No such address
5009 The socket descriptor is not valid
500C Not enough storage space
500D Authorization denied
5011 Entry exists
5016 An argument is not valid
5017 An internal table has no more space
5020 There is interference on the connection
5023 This operation was blocked and the socket is non-blocking
5024 The socket is non-blocking and the connection cannot be closed down
5025 The socket is non-blocking and a previous connection attempt has not been
concluded
5026 Socket operation on a non-socket
5027 The destination address is not valid
5028 Message too long
5029 Wrong type of protocol for the socket
502A Protocol not available
33002479 10/2019 163

Hex. Error Meaning

Code
502B Protocol not supported
502C Socket type not supported
502D Operation not supported at socket
502E Protocol family not supported
502F Address family not supported
5030 Address is already in use
5031 Address not available
5032 Network is out of order
5033 Network cannot be reached
5034 Network shut down the connection during reset
5035 The connection was terminated by the peer
5036 The connection was reset by the peer
5037 An internal buffer is required, but cannot be assigned
5038 The socket is already connected
5039 The socket is not connected
503A Cannot transmit after the socket has been shut off
503B Too many references; cannot splice
503C Connection timed out
503D The connection attempt was denied
5040 Host is out of order
5041 The destination host could not be reached from this node
5042 Directory not empty
5046 NI_INIT returned -1
5047 The MTU is not valid
5048 The hardware length is not valid
5049 The route specified cannot be found
504A Collision when invoking Select; these conditions have already been selected
by another job
504B The job ID is not valid
5050 No Network Resource
5051 Length Error
5052 Addressing Error
5053 Application Error
5054 Client cannot process request
164 33002479 10/2019

Hex. Error Meaning

Code
5055 No Network Resource
5056 Non-Operational TCP connection
5057 Incoherent configuration
6003 FIN or RST not expected
F001 In reset mode
F002 Component not fully initialized
33002479 10/2019 165

Reset Optional Module
Description
A reset optional module operation causes a Quantum NOE Ethernet communications module or
the Ethernet port on a 140CPU65150/60 CPU module to enter a cycle that resets its working
environment. To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a reset option module operation, use
function code 10 (see page 139).
A reset optional module operation can be performed on TCP/IP Ethernet (see page 159) and
SY/MAX Ethernet networks.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 10 = reset optional module
CONTROL[3] No significance
CONTROL[5] Routing register (see page 141)
...
CONTROL[9]
Control Block Usage for SY/MAX Ethernet (CONTROL)
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 10 = reset optional module
CONTROL[5] Routing register (see page 142)
...
CONTROL[9]
166 33002479 10/2019

Read CTE
Description
A read CTE operation reads a specified number of bytes from the Ethernet configuration extension
table in the specified buffer of PLC memory. These bytes start with a byte offset at the CTE table
start. The CTE table contents are displayed in the DATABUF output parameter (see page 138). To
program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a clear remote statistics operation, use function code 11
(see page 139).
A read CTE operation can be performed on TCP/IP Ethernet and SY/MAX Ethernet networks.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 11 = read CTE
CONTROL[3] The length setting: a value from 12 to 37
Least significant byte = mapping index
Either a value displayed in the byte of the register or is not used.
or Most significant byte = network adapter module slot
CONTROL[6]... No significance
CONTROL[9]
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 11 = read CTE
CONTROL[3] Number of words transferred
CONTROL[4] Byte offset in the PLC register structure, specifying from where the CTE
bytes are read
MSB: slot of the NOE module
CONTROL[6] Terminator: FF hex
...
CONTROL[9]
33002479 10/2019 167

CTE Indicator Implementation (DATABUF)

The values in the CTE table are displayed in the DATABUF output when a CTE read operation is
implemented. The registers display the following CTE data:
CTE indicator implementation (DATABUF):
Parameter Register Contents

Frame type DATABUF[0] 1 = 802.3
2 = Ethernet
IP address DATABUF[1] First byte of the IP address
DATABUF[2] Second byte of the IP address
DATABUF[3] Third byte of the IP address
DATABUF[4] Fourth byte of the IP address
Lower netmask DATABUF[5] Most significant word
DATABUF[6] Least significant word
Gateway DATABUF[7] First byte of the gateway
DATABUF[8] Second byte of the gateway
DATABUF[9] Third byte of the gateway
DATABUF[10] Fourth byte of the gateway
168 33002479 10/2019

Write CTE
Description
A write CTE operation writes the CTE configuration table from the specified data (DATABUF) to a
specified Ethernet configuration extension table or to a specific slot. To program an MBP_MSTR
block to perform a write CTE operation, use function code 12 (see page 139).
A write CTE operation can be performed on TCP/IP Ethernet (see page 159) and SY/MAX
Ethernet networks.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 12 = write CTE
CONTROL[3] The length setting: a value from 12 to 37.
Least significant byte = mapping index
Either a value displayed in the byte of the address or is not used.
or
Most significant byte = network adapter module slot
...
CONTROL[9]
33002479 10/2019 169

Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 12 = Write CTE (Config extension table)
CONTROL[4] Byte offset in the PLC address structure specifying where the CTE bytes
are written
Most significant byte = NOE module slot
Least significant byte = Destination drop number
CONTROL[6] Terminator: FF hex
...
CONTROL[9]
CTE Indicator Implementation (DATABUF)

The values in the Ethernet configuration extension table are displayed in the DATABUF output field
when a write CTE operation is implemented. The registers are used to transfer the following CTE
data:
CTE indicator implementation (DATABUF):
Parameter Register Contents

Frame type DATABUF[0] 1 = 802.3
2 = Ethernet
IP address DATABUF[1] First byte of the IP address
DATABUF[2] Second byte of the IP address
DATABUF[3] Third byte of the IP address
DATABUF[4] Fourth byte of the IP address
Lower netmask DATABUF[5] Most significant word
DATABUF[6] Least significant word
Gateway DATABUF[7] First byte of the gateway
DATABUF[8] Second byte of the gateway
DATABUF[9] Third byte of the gateway
DATABUF[10] Fourth byte of the gateway
170 33002479 10/2019

Send Email
Description
The controller monitors the system and dynamically creates an electronic mail message, which
alerts local or remote users.
A user-defined event or condition triggers the MSTR block to create a message. Each message
uses one of three user-defined headers. Each message sent from the controller can contain text
and variable information (with a maximum of 238 bytes).
The project selects the appropriate header. Each header contains:
 sender name
 list of recipients
 subject
To program an MBP_MSTR block to send email, use function code 13 (see page 139).
A send email operation can be performed on a TCP/IP Ethernet network.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 13 = send Email
CONTROL[2] Indicates the email-specific error codes (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, I/O Management, Block Library)
CONTROL[4] Not used
CONTROL[5] High byte: slot address of the NOE module or 0xFE for the 140 CPU 651 60
Low byte: always 0
CONTROL[6] Not used
...
CONTROL[9]
33002479 10/2019 171

DATABUF Parameter Description
Register Contents
DATABUF 1 The mail header is the least significant byte with a value of 1, 2, or
3.
The most significant byte contains the number (n) of characters in
the subject, a value between 0 and 238.
DATABUF 2 The data (in ASCII format) that will be copied into the Email
... message.
DATABUF 119 The first n characters are added to the configured Email subject.
The remaining characters (2 * N -2 - n) are part of the message
body, where N is the number of words transferred.
172 33002479 10/2019

Send Modbus Request
At a Glance
Use MSTR operation 15 to send generic Modbus requests on the network.
NOTE: This operation is not available on Modbus Plus ports (embedded port on CPU or NOM
modules) and the embedded Ethernet port on a CPU.
Block Operation
The MBP_MSTR block can send requests and receive responses up to 253 bytes long.
For the operation, refer to Block Operation (see page 136):
 When the ENABLE input pin is turned ON, operation 15 begins.
 If the ABORT input pin is turned ON or if the ENABLE input pin is turned OFF, the operation
ends.
 The ACTIVE output pin is ON during the operation.
 The ERROR output pin turns ON if the operation aborts without success.
 The SUCCESS output pin turns ON if the operation completes with success.
 The CONTROL and DATABUF output pins define the operation (refer to the Control Block
(see page 173) and Data Buffer (see page 174)).
 EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters.
Control Block
The format of the Control block is described in the following table:
Word Description
CONTROL[1] 15 = Send Modbus Request
CONTROL[2] Indicates detected error status
CONTROL[3] DATABUF length (WORDs)
CONTROL[4] Offset for the beginning of the response in the DATABUF (WORDs).
NOTE: To avoid overwriting the request, the Response Offset value
multiplied by 2 must be greater than the Request Length
(CONTROL[10]).
High byte = Ethernet communication module slot
Low byte = MBP on Ethernet transporter (MET) mapping index (also
known as Unit ID)
CONTROL[6] Byte 4 of the IP address (MSB)
CONTROL[7] Byte 3 of the IP address
CONTROL[8 Byte 2 of the IP address
CONTROL[9] Byte 1 of the IP address (LSB)
33002479 10/2019 173

Word Description
CONTROL[10] Length of the DATABUF Request data (bytes)
CONTROL[11] Length of the DATABUF Response received (bytes)
NOTE: This is read only, it is set by option module after operation
completion.
Data Buffer
The MODBUS protocol defines a simple protocol data unit (PDU) independent of the underlying
communication layers.
The data buffer (DATABUF) consists of contiguous registers that include both the Modbus Request
PDU and the Modbus Response PDU:
DATABUF Modbus Request PDU:

Data Buffer Length is set in Data Request Length is set in the CONTROL[10] word.
the CONTROL[3] word. Modbus Response PDU:
Data Response Start (Response offset) is set in the
CONTROL[4] word.
NOTE: To avoid overwriting the request, the Response Offset
value multiplied by 2 must be greater than the Request Length
(CONTROL[10]).
Data Response Length is set in the CONTROL[11] word.
CAUTION
LOSS OF DATA
Verify that the Response Offset is greater than the Data Request Length.
NOTE: Both the Request and Response must be structured in little endian order. Each word of 2
bytes of data in little endian format, where the least significant byte is stored in the smallest memory
address.
174 33002479 10/2019

Modbus Request
The Modbus Request PDU format is:
Byte offset Field Data type Description

1 Function code BYTE Modbus function code
2 Request data BYTE area This field is function code dependent and
contains information such as variable
references, variable counts, data offsets,
sub-function codes and so on.
Modbus Response
The Modbus Response PDU format is:

1 Function code BYTE Modbus function code
2 Response data BYTE area This field is function code dependent and
contains information such as variable
references, variable counts, data offsets,
sub-function codes and so on.
Modbus Exception Response

The Modbus Exception Response PDU format is:

1 Function code BYTE Modbus function code + 80 (hex)
2 Exception code BYTE This field is defined in the MODBUS
Application Protocol Specification.
Modbus Specification
The standard Modbus function codes are defined in the MODBUS Application Protocol
Specification, V1.1b, which can be downloaded from www.modbus-ida.org.
33002479 10/2019 175

Example of a Send Modbus Request

To read 4 contiguous Input registers (Modbus Function code 4) starting at register 100 (64 hex) in
a remote device. A Modbus Request has to be sent on the network with the following Modbus
Response.
Request Field Name Value

Function code 04
Starting address, High 00
Starting address, Low 64
Number of registers, High 00
Number of registers, Low 04
Response Field Name Value

Function code 04
Byte count 08
Register 100 value, High 00
Register 100 value, Low 01
Using the following CONTROL word values:

 CONTROL[1] (MSTR operation) = 15
 CONTROL[2] (Error Code) = refer to CONTROL block description (read-only)
 CONTROL[3] (DATABUF length) = 11
 CONTROL[4] (Response Offset) = 5
 CONTROL[5] (Routing Register) = refer to CONTROL block description
 CONTROL[6] (IP1) = refer to CONTROL block description
 CONTROL[10] (Request Length) = 5
 CONTROL[11] (Response Length) = 10
176 33002479 10/2019

the data encoding in the Data Buffer is as follows:
Field Value (hex) Description

Request DATABUF[1] 0400 Function code + Starting address, High
DATABUF[2] 6400 Starting address, Low + Number of registers, High
DATABUF[3] 0400 Number of registers, Low + NULL
DATABUF[4] 0000 Null
Response DATABUF[6] 0408 Function code + Byte count
DATABUF[7] 0001 Register 100 value, High + Register 100 value, Low
33002479 10/2019 177

Close Connection Request
At a Glance
Use MBP_MSTR operation 16 to close a Modbus TCP/IP connection on the network.
NOTE: This operation is not available on Modbus Plus ports (embedded port on CPU or NOM
modules).
Block Operation
The MBP_MSTR block can send requests and receive responses up to 253 bytes long. For block
operation, refer to the block description (see page 136):
 When the ENABLE input pin is turned ON, operation 15 begins.
 If the ABORT input pin is turned ON or if the ENABLE input pin is turned OFF, the operation
ends.
 The ACTIVE output pin is ON during the operation.
 The ERROR output pin turns ON if the operation aborts without success.
 The SUCCESS output pin turns ON if the operation completes with success.
 The CONTROL and DATABUF output pins (see page 138) define the operation.
 EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters.
Control Block
The format of the CONTROL block is described below:
Register Function Description

CONTROL[1] Operation 16 = close connection
CONTROL[2] Error status Indicates detected error status
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O
Management, Block Library) (read only)
CONTROL[3] (not used) –
CONTROL[4] (not used) –
CONTROL[5] Routing Register High byte = Ethernet communication
module slot
Low byte = MBP on Ethernet
transporter (MET) mapping index (also
known as Unit ID)
CONTROL[6] IP Address Byte 4 of the IP address (MSB)
CONTROL[9] Byte 1 of the IP address (LSB)
178 33002479 10/2019

Change Modbus Plus Address
Description
Use MSTR Operation 17 (Change Modbus Plus Address) to change the Modbus Plus address
associated with the embedded Modbus Plus port of the CPU.
On Low End CPUs, this function overrides the address switch (the hardware rotary switch behind
the CPU) as long as the CPU is powered on. The address of hardware switch is restored when the
CPU is restarted.
On High End CPUs, a new address set with this function is saved in the configuration table and is
restored on subsequent CPUs starts.
Setting an address to a station that is already used by another station on the network disconnects
the station already on the network and may cause unpredictable operation on the network.
CAUTION
UNINTENTIONAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that the Modbus Plus address to be set is not assigned to another station before using
Operation 17.
The Operation 17 can only be performed for a Modbus Plus CPU embedded port. This operation
is not available on the Modbus Plus ports of NOM modules.
33002479 10/2019 179

Control Block
The following table describes the format of the Operation 17 Control Block:
Register Meaning
Control[1] 17 (Change Modbus Plus Address operation)
Control[2] Detected error status, see Modbus Plus, SY/MAX, and
Ethernet TCP/IP Error Codes (see page 143)
Control[3] 16#1234
Control[4] 16#5678
Control[5] 16#00AA
Control[6 16#00BB
Control[7] 16#00CC
Control[8] 16#00DD
Control[9] 16#00EE
NOTE: The constant values in CONTROL[3] to CONTROL[9] consist of a signature that prevents
unintentional use of this operation.
Data Buffer
The following table describes the format of the Operation 17 Data Buffer:
Register Meaning
DADABUF[1] Low byte: new address (range: 1 to 64)
180 33002479 10/2019

Read/Write Data
Introduction
In a single transaction, the MSTR read and write operations can transfer data from a master source
device to a specified slave destination device, then transfer data from this specified slave source
to the master. It uses a master transaction path and may require several cycles to complete. To
program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a combined read/write operation, use function code 23
(see page 139).
The combined read/write operation can be used only with these models:
 Quantum: NOE 771 01 (3.0 or later) or NOE 771 11 (3.0 or later)
 Momentum: M1E CPU (1.0 or later)
Control Block Usage
Register Content
CONTROL[1] 23 = read/write data.
CONTROL[3] Number of registers to be sent to the slave.
CONTROL[4] Specifies the %MW starting register in the slave to which the data will be
written, e.g. 1 = %MW1, 49 = %MW49.
Most significant byte: network adapter module slot.
Least significant byte: MBP on Ethernet Transporter (MET) mapping
index.
CONTROL[6] Each address contains 1 byte of the 32-bit IP address, where the MSB is
... in CONTROL[6] and the LSB is in CONTROL[9].
CONTROL[9]
CONTROL[10] Number of registers to be read from slave.
CONTROL[11] Specifies the %MW starting register in the slave from which the data is
read, e.g. 1 = %MW1, 49 = %MW49.
NOTE:
When configuring the MBP_MSTR block for a read/write data operation, note that
 The DATABUF output parameter is used to store, in the following sequence, both:
1 the data to be written
2 the data to be read
 The size of the DATABUF output parameter must equal the combined size of the data to be
written and the data to be read; if the size is smaller, data will be overwritten and may be lost.
 Both the CONTROL and DATABUF parameters must be stored at located addresses, for example
%MW addresses.
33002479 10/2019 181

Enable / Disable HTTP or FTP/TFTP Services
Description
An Enable Disable HTTP or FTP/TFTP Services operation changes the enabled state of
the module’s HTTP or FTP/TFTP services.
An Enable Disable HTTP or FTP/TFTP Services operation can be performed on TCP/IP
Ethernet networks (see page 159).

When HTTP or FTP/TFTP has been enabled using Control Expert configuration tools
(see page 107), an MSTR block can be used to change the enabled state of the service while the
application is running. The MSTR block cannot change the state of the HTTP or FTP/TFTP
services if the service was disabled using one of the configuration tools.
Register Meaning
CONTROL[1] 65520 (dec) FFF0 (hex) = enable / disable HTTP or FTP/TFTP
CONTROL[2] Indicates the error status. Possible return codes include:
0x000 (Success): MSTR block with operational code 65520 was called and
the enabled state of HTTP or FTP/TFTP was changed.
0x5068 (Busy): MSTR block with operational code 65520 was called within
2 seconds of the previous call (regardless of return code from previous
call).
0x4001 (Same state): MSTR block with operational code 65520 was called
to change the enabled state of HTTP and FTP/TFTP to the states they were
already in.
0x2004 (Invalid data): MSTR block with operational code 65520 was called
and the data in the control block did not match the specifications.
0x5069 (Disabled): If the HTTP or FTP/TFTP service was already disabled
via the Control Expert interface when the MSTR block with operational
code 65520 was called to change the state of the disabled service.
CONTROL[3] Set this register to 1
CONTROL[4]
CONTROL[5] Module slot number and destination ID
High byte = Module slot number communication module slot
Low byte = Destination ID
CONTROL[6] Request mode
Bit 0 (LSB) = 1: Enable FTP/TFTP
Bit 0 (LSB) = 0: Disable FTP/TFTP
Bit 1 = 1: Enable HTTP
Bit 1 = 0: Disable HTTP
182 33002479 10/2019

Register Meaning
CONTROL[7] Set this register to 0
CONTROL[8]
CONTROL[9]
HTTP, FTP, and TFTP service state changes made by MSTR with operation code 65520 (dec) are
overridden by the configured value when the module is power-cycled or reset and when a new
application is downloaded to the module.
Here are some examples:
State Configured By Action attempted using Result

Control Expert MSTR with operation
code 65520) (dec)
Disabled Any MSTR returns error code 0x5069 (service was already
disabled by configuration)
Enabled Disable MSTR returns code 0x000 (success).
 Another MSTR block action enables the service
--OR--
 The module is reset or power-cycled
--OR--
 A new application is downloaded with the service
disabled by configuration
Enable MSTR returns error code 0x4001 (same state). No change
made.
33002479 10/2019 183

184 33002479 10/2019

Global Data (Publish/Subscribe)
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 5
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Utility
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Utility
Introduction
The material in this section presents the Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) utility available on the
following modules.
 140 NOE 771 01
 140 NOE 771 11
 140 CPU 651 x0
For more information on the publish-subscribe model, go to this URL:

http://www.isa.org/journals/intech/feature/printable/1,1171,596,00.html

Topic Page
Planning the Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) System 186
Multicast Filtering 190
Quantum NOE Global Data Configuration 192
Configuration of Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) by the Web for NOE 771 x1 195
33002479 10/2019 185

Planning the Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) System
Overview
Global Data service is a real-time publisher/subscriber mechanism that provides the most efficient
data exchange for PLC application coordination.
Devices that support Global Data are arranged in a distribution group for the purpose of application
variable exchange and synchronization. Each Global Data device can publish up to one network
(application) variable and subscribe to up to 64 network (application) variables.
The Quantum NOE’s embedded Global Data Configuration Web page provides a configuration
screen (see page 192) to determine which and how many application variables are exchanged
with this service. After configuration, exchanges between all stations belonging to the same
distribution group are done automatically.
The Global Data service uses %MW (4x registers) or unlocated variables for Global Data
exchanges.
Key Features of Global Data

The main features for Global Data are:
 One publisher and many subscribers
 A device can publish one network variable of up to 512 %MW words (4x registers) or unlocated
variables
 A device can subscribe to up to 64 network variables of up to 2048 %MW words (4x registers)
or unlocated variables
 A device subscribes to the complete network variable
 One distribution group per network IP address
 Application-defined publication rate
 Up to 64 Global Data Network variables (numbered from 1 to 64) can be part of the data
distribution group
 An NOE has only one multicast address. Consequently, it can only publish and subscribe within
the group
 A device can participate in several distribution groups by using multiple NOEs in the rack
Global Data has an advantage over client/server services when more than one subscriber is
receiving the same data since only one transaction is necessary for all subscribers to receive the
data. There are two benefits:
 the reduction of overall network traffic
 tighter synchronization of multiple subscribers
186 33002479 10/2019

Planning Your System Configuration

The Global Data (publish/subscribe) utility is a powerful function incorporated into the NOE product
line. Implementing Global Data requires a configuration that spans many PLCs throughout the
system. Therefore, we recommend pre-planning your installation before implementation. Pre-
planning saves time and money by:
 reducing errors, which circumvents a debugging effort
 ensuring system consistency
Go to paper before computer.

We offer the following table to assist in system planning. The Global Data Planning Spreadsheet
below is a graphic representation of a recommended configuration table for system planning. You
can create your own table using the format below or you can download a Microsoft ExcelTM
spreadsheet template, which is available on the Schneider public Web site.
Here is the graphic representation of the Global Data Planning Spreadsheet:
Parameter Variable ID Symbol* Length Device Number Variable Public.

Checking (Registers) Status
1 2 ... 3
1 VALVE_STATUS 20 PUB SUB NONE OK
2 VALVE_CONTROL 10 SUB NONE PUB OK
...
64 PUMP_CONTROL 50 SUB PUB NONE OK
Device Publication Status: OK OK OK
Total Publication Size per Node: 20 50 10
Total Subscription Size per Node: 60 20 0
Group IP Address 239.255.255.0
Multicast Filtering OFF
Enabled
Default %MW Address for %MW100
Health
Distribution Period 10
Health Timeout 1000
Data Zone %MW200
*Entries or changes to the symbol (description) do NOT affect or change a variable or the system. The symbol used
in the Quantum product line has no relation to the Concept/Control Expert product line symbol(s).
33002479 10/2019 187

Table of Global Data Limits:
Parameter Limit
Maximum number of publish variables per 1
device
Maximum size for the publish variable 512 registers = 512 Words (16 bits) = 1024 bytes
Maximum number of subscription variables 64 (63 if this device is publishing)
per device
Maximum size for the subscribe variables per 2048 registers = 2048 Words (16 bits) = 4096 bytes
device
NOTE: We recommend that you consider the following when planning.

 Allow for a 10 to 20 % increase in growth of any variable.
 Add variables at the end of the configuration where they do not affect the existing application
address. Therefore, you avoid changing the existing addresses in your configuration, which can
be a time consuming process.
Table of Global Data Planning Spreadsheet
Parameter Checking Reserved
Variable Id Represents the Data ID on the NOE’s Global Data Configuration Web page
Symbol Symbolic name for Global Data exchange.
Length Words (Registers) Length of Global Data information. Number of %MW words (4x registers) or unlocated
variables.
Device Number Number of devices (up to 64) for the Global Data network.
Variable Public. Status Automatic information of the correct publication status of the Global Data network. Only
by using the Microsoft ExcelTM spreadsheet. Information per symbol.
Device Publication Status Automatic information of the correct publication status of the Global Data network. Only
by using the Microsoft ExcelTM spreadsheet. Information per device.
Total Publication Size per Publication size for the specific node. The maximum publication size is 512 words
Node (registers) per node
Total Subscription Size per Subscription size for the specific node. The maximum subscription size is 2048 words
Node (registers) per node
Group IP Address Enabled IP address for multicast networking. Identifies the stations distribution group. The
address range is from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255
Multicast Filtering Enabled A check box for Ethernet switches that support multicast filtering.
Default Address for %MW (4x register) address for the Health bits. This is the memory area where the
Health%MW (4x register) Health bits are stored. It has the size of 4 words (registers).
Distribution Period Is the minimum number of controller scan times before an update will occur.
188 33002479 10/2019

Health Timeout Is the maximum time between received subscriptions before a subscription is declared
unhealthy (faulty). The value is measured in milliseconds and can be set from 50 to
15000 ms in 50 ms increments.
Data Zone The starting address for the data. This are the registers where the data information are
stored.
33002479 10/2019 189

Multicast Filtering
Overview
Your NOE may offer the multicast filtering functionality.
The global data service synchronizes several stations located in a distribution group. A distribution
group is a set of stations identified by using the same IP multicast address for all stations in the
group. By using the same IP address for multiple devices, multicast exchanges can be used to
distribute global data. Several independent distribution groups can coexist on the same sub-
network. Each distribution group possesses its own unique IP multicast address.
Early versions of switches treat multicast packets as a broadcast, thereby broadcasting to all nodes
and suppressing all benefits of both switching and multicasting. Newer versions of switches
provide automatic multicast filtering, and consequently only forward multicast traffic to ports that
are connected to registered end stations.
Multicast Filtering Protocols

The following multicast filtering protocols are supported by Ethernet modules for its global data
service.
 GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
GMRP provides a mechanism that allows bridges and end stations to dynamically manage the
membership of multicast groups.
NOTE: GMRP is defined in the IEEE 802.1D-1998 Standard, which is available as a free
download at: http://IEEE802.org.
 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
IGMP is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of internet protocol
multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast
group memberships.
Reducing Traffic
Multicast filtering helps to reduce the traffic on a network, because broadcasts are sent only to
interested, or subscribed, devices.
For distributed applications and one to many communications, multicast affords advantages over
unicast because it:
 utilizes the network bandwidth more efficiently
 sends a single transmission instead of multiple transmissions.
 reduces collisions
 optimizes the performance of Ethernet module processing
190 33002479 10/2019

Using Multicast Filtering

These ConneXium switches support multicast filtering. Other switches from alternate vendors also
support multicast filtering.
Switch Description
499NES17100 Managed Switch with 7 ports 10/100 BASE-TX
499NOS17100 Managed Switch with 5 ports 10/100 BASE-TX and 2 ports 100 BASE-FX
33002479 10/2019 191

Quantum NOE Global Data Configuration
Introduction
Global data configuration is carried out in the network configuration as well as the data editor. The
variables for the publish/subscribe procedure are configured in the data editor.
The screen shot shows the network configuration global data configuration settings:
Health time out After this time period expires, the received data becomes invalid.
Group address Class D multicast IP address. All nodes in the global data procedure
use the same multicast address for distributing or receiving data. The
address range is: 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Distribution period Time after which the data is received or sent. Minimum scan time of
the PLC.
Group name Logical name. Defines the varibale allocation to different
communication configurations in the variable editor.
Health bit block Address for retrieving the status information of the global data
procedure.
192 33002479 10/2019

Multicast filtering Activates an Ethernet module that supports multicast filtering. From
the drop down list, select:
 None: disable both GMRP & IGMP
(Data will be sent to all end devices in the network.)
 GMRP
Make sure your client, server and switches, and routers support
and enable GMRP.
 IGMP V1
Make sure your client, server and switches, and routers support
and enable IGMP.
Note: The following modules support IGMP V1:
 140 NOE 771 01 V4.4 or later
 140 NOE 771 11 V4.4 or later
 140 CPU 651 50/60 V2.7 or later
NOTE: The IGMP and None features are only available in Unity 4.1
or later.
NOTE: Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version
13.1 or earlier.
NOTE: A Quantum PLC does not update health bits in STOP mode.
The screen shot shows an image of the data editor:
33002479 10/2019 193

Name Variables symbols
Type Variable type
Address Variable address
Global Data Type of Global Data Variable. Options: No/Publish/Subscribe
Group Group name for allocating the variables of the existing network
description. When creating the different Ethernet networks, a logical
connection is arranged here between the network and the variable
declaration.
ID Variable ID
194 33002479 10/2019

Configuration of Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) by the Web for NOE 771 x1
Modeling the System Configuration

There are two methods of configuring a system:
 Configuring each device separately
Configure each device through the Global Data Configuration Web page (see page 299).
Repeat for each device in the system. Entry errors may occur because the same information
must be reentered on each and every device, possibly as many as 64 times.
 Copying the configuration (preferred)
Configure all variable IDs, symbols (descriptions), and lengths on one NOE, upload to your PC,
download the same configuration to all devices and finish with a small customization to each
node.
NOTE: The Copy Configuration method reduces entry errors, allows for verifying the configuration,
and permits you to determine if the system is satisfactory for your needs before implementing the
configuration system wide.
You enter the variable ID, symbol (description), and length only once, thus maintaining
consistency.
When your planning is complete, follow the Configuring Your NOE steps below. We present these
steps both as a picture and as instructions.
33002479 10/2019 195

The following illustration shows the Configuring Your NOE steps:
196 33002479 10/2019

Configuring the NOE
Step Action
1 Select one NOE.
2 Using your browser, navigate to that NOE’s Global Data Configuration page.
Follow these links: | Setup | Global Data |
3 Enter the configuration’s variable IDs, symbols (description), and lengths.
4 Click the Update Global Data Configuration button to update the file. This creates
the file glbdata.ini.
Full path follows:
ftp://NOE_IP_ADDRESS/wwwroot/conf/glbdata/glbdata.ini
Note: You substitute NOE_IP_ADDRESS with an address like 192.168.000.010.
Please check the address with your system administrator.
5 Using the FTP process, upload the glbdata.ini file to a PC. (See the information
below at Uploading a glbdata.ini file.)
6 Stop each controller before you do the customization.
7 Using the same path, download the glbdata.ini file to the other devices. (See
the information below at Downloading a glbdata.ini file.)
8 Connect your Web browser to each device to customize start address and the
Publish/Subscribe setting.
NOTE: The Global Data Configuration page is populated with data from the glbdata.ini
configuration file.
Uploading a glbdat.ini File to a PC
Step Action
1 At the DOS prompt type FTP followed by the IP address and press Enter.
2 At the User prompt type FTP Username and press Enter.
3 At the password prompt enter your FTP Password and press Enter.
4 At the FTP prompt type cd wwwroot/conf/glbdata and press Enter.
5 At the FTP prompt type get and press Enter.
6 At the local file prompt type glbdata.ini and press Enter.
7 At the remote file prompt type glbdata.ini and press Enter.
33002479 10/2019 197

Downloading a glbdat.ini File to another NOE
Step Action
1 At the DOS prompt type FTP followed by the IP address and press Enter.
2 At the User prompt type the FTP username and press Enter.
3 At the password prompt enter your FTP Password and press Enter.
4 At the FTP prompt type cd wwwroot/conf/glbdata and press Enter.
5 At the FTP prompt type put and press Enter.
6 At the local file prompt type glbdata.ini and press Enter.
7 At the remote file prompt type glbdata.ini and press Enter.
Verifying System Operation
Step Action
1 Verify all controllers are running.
2 Look at the health of all variables using the Global Data Diagnostic page.
Follow these links: | Diagnostics | NOE Diagnostics | Global Data
198 33002479 10/2019

Transferring Data with the I/O Scanner
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 6
I/O Scanner
I/O Scanner
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Ethernet modules’ I/O scanner capabilities.

Topic Page
I/O Scanner Concepts 200
Configuring the Quantum I/O Scanner 204
I/O Scanning Contextual Menu for Copy/Cut/Paste 210
I/O Scanning with Multiple Lines 212
Introduction to Configuring Advantys from Control Expert 214
Introduction to Configuring the PRM Master DTM 218
Introduction to Configuring a BMX PRA 0100 from Control Expert 220
Property Box 224
Saving an Advantys Configuration in an Control Application 230
Managed Variables 231
I/O Scanner Response Times: Remote Input to Remote Output 233
33002479 10/2019 199

I/O Scanner Concepts
Introduction
The I/O Scanner is a feature that resides in Ethernet (NOE 771 00, -01, -11, and CPU 651 x0)
modules. The I/O Scanner allows, through a controller, repeated reading from and/or writing to
scanned devices.
Use the I/O scanner to transfer data between network devices.
Configure the I/O Scanner with Schneider Electric’s programming package Control Expert. (I/O
Scanner configuration information (see page 204) appears elsewhere in this guide.)
NOTE: We recommend you program with words if your project involves both 140 CPU 651 x0
modules and 140 NOE 771 01 modules in the same application. Due to the unique manner in
which each of these modules were developed, they both correctly scan towards %I, but they
interpret the data in different programming languages. The NOE module reads in IEC format;
whereas, the controller module reads in LL984 format.
Health Block Bits

Each bit corresponds to an entry in the I/O Scanner table. Each entry in the table represents one
logical device.
The bits contain the health status for the Modicon Quantum I/O Scanner.
NOTE: A Quantum PLC does not update health bits in STOP mode.
Device Control Block

With the Device Control Block, disable an individual entry/device in the I/O Scanner table by
checking the box and setting the associated bit in Device Control Block to 1.
Repetitive Rate Step

In the Repetitive Rate Step field, enter a rate of time for how often you want the I/O scanner to send
a query to the device after the rate has timed out.
I/O Scan List

The I/O scan list is a configuration table that identifies the targets to which repetitive
communications are authorized. While the controller is running, the Ethernet module transfers data
to and from the controller’s registers as indicated by the I/O scan list.
200 33002479 10/2019

I/O Scanner Parameters

The I/O Scanner parameters are described in the following table:
Parameter Value
Max. No. of Devices 64: 140 NOE 771 00 (Version 2.2 or earlier)
128: 140 NOE 771 00 (Version 3.0 or later), 140 NOE 771 01, and
140 NOE 771 11 only
128: 140 CPU 651 x0
Max. No. of Input Words 4000
Max. No. of Output Words 4000
Health Timeout Value User configured: 1...65535 ms in 1 ms increments
Last Value (Input) User configured (Zero or Hold)
IP Address User configured
IP address of scanned device (Slave IP)
Local and Remote Register User configured
Reference
Repetitive Rate The rate at which data will be scanned, from 0...65535 in multiples of:
 If you are running Unity Pro V2.0 or higher
 140 NOE 771 01/11: 16 ms
 140 CPU 651 x0: 10 ms
 If you are running Unity Pro V4.0

 140 NOE 771 01/11: 5 ms (min), 200 ms (max)
 140 CPU 651 x0: 5 ms
Unit ID User configured

Configure ID only if using a bridge
Gateway/Bridge Device To allow slower TCP/IP network devices (i.e., gateways and bridges) to be
compatible with the I/O Scanner:
 Select the check box to enable this feature. Defines a new bit, and sets it
to high (1).
 Deselect the check box to disable this feature (default). Defines a new bit,
and sets it to zero (0).
Operation through a bridge Modbus bridge: Supported
Modbus Plus bridge: Supported
Elsewhere in this guide is information about I/O scan response times for high-performance
communications modules (see page 233).
Using the I/O Scanner with an IP Router

NOTE: The I/O Scanners in the 140 NOE 771 x1 and 140 CPU 651 x0 modules send out requests
with a Time To Live (TTL) of 32, which allows passage through multiple routers.
33002479 10/2019 201


Important information about using the Device Control Block:
Registers The Device Control Block consists of registers either 8 single words or 4 double
words. Contents of the registers are mapped in the controller’s memory. Each bit
corresponds to an entry in the table (see the tables below.)
Disabling Devices Each I/O Scanner device can be disabled. To disable individual devices:
1. Select the Device Control Block option on the I/O Scanner tab in Control
Expert. (Insert a check mark in the box.)
2. Set the associated bit = 1.
Mapping Device Control See the table for mapping entry numbers to bits.
Block Bits to I/O Scanner Each entry number represents a logical device on the network.
Entry Numbers (#)
Setting Bits If Device Control Block bit is set to
 0 = Device is enabled
 1 = Device is disabled
Mapping Device Control Block Bits to I/O Scanner Entry Numbers (#)
Single Word (W)

Register (%MDx:4)
W1 Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
%MW Entry
[x+1] #
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W2 Table 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
%MW Entry
[x+2] #
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W3 Table 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
%MW Entry
[x+3] #
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word 4 through Word 7 (Table Entry 49
through 112)
W8 Table 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128
%MW Entry
[x+8] #
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NOTE: Bits are counted from right to left starting from bit 0 (low bit). Examples: to configure
%MD1:4 as a device control block in the I/O Scanner table, use %MW2, bit 15 to enable or disable
table entry 1. Use %MW3, bit 15 to enable or disable table entry 17.
202 33002479 10/2019

NOTE: Quantum and Premium co-processors follow Premium Ethernet module control bit
operation.
Double Word (DW)

Register (%MDx:4)
DW1%MD Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
x[0] Entry #
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
DW2 Table 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
%MD x[1] Entry #
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Table 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Entry #
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Word 3 through Word 4 (Table Entry 49
through 112)
DW %MD Table 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 12 122 123 124 125 126 127 128
x[4] Entry #
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NOTE: Bits are counted from right to left starting from bit 0 (low bit). For example, to configure
%MD1:4 as a device control block in the I/O scanner table, use %MD1[0], bit 31 to enable or
disable table entry 1. Use %MD1[1], bit 15 to enable or disable table entry 17.
33002479 10/2019 203

Configuring the Quantum I/O Scanner
The I/O Scanner Configuration Dialog

When you click the I/O Scanning tab in the Ethernet module configuration screen, the I/O Scanner
screen opens:
NOTE: This screen shows I/O Scanner services for an 140 NOE 771 01 or -11 module. The I/O
Scanner screen is slightly different for the CPU 651 x0 module, which does not display a Health
Block field.
204 33002479 10/2019

Health Block
The Health Block field (number 1 in previous figure) lets you define the first word or bit in a health
table. That table can be up to 8 words (%IW) or 128 bits (%I) in length. Each bit in the table
represents the status of an individual device. The following table shows how the bits are displayed
based on the data type you use:
Bit Data Type

%I %IW
1 %I1 %IW1.15
2 %I 2 %IW1.14
...
16 %I16 %IW1.0
17 %I17 %IW2.15
By default, the table comprises words starting at %IW1.0. If you want to set the table to bits, you
need to specify a %I value in an increment of 16 (%I1, %I16, %I32, etc.).
NOTE: The Health Block field is available only for the NOE 771 00, -01, and -11. It is not available
for the CPU 651 x0.
NOTE: For Safety Monitor applications, the Health Block is mapped on %M/%MW from the UMA
zone instead of %I/%IW.

The Device Control Block (number 2 in previous figure) lets you disable any scanned device by
setting a bit associated with that device to 1. The I/O scanner closes the connection and sets the
Health Bit to 0 (unhealthy state).
To enable the Device Control Block, select the check box in the I/O Scanner configuration dialog
(item 2 in previous figure).
NOTE: To enable the Device Control Block, use:
 Control Expert at V2.0 or later
 an 140 NOE 771 01 or 140 NOE 771 11 at version 3.5 or later
 a 140 CPU 651 x0 at version 2.0 or later
If you attempt to enable the Device Control Block with an earlier version of the firmware, the I/O
scanning service is disabled.
If the check box is not selected, the I/O scanner service is enabled, and you cannot disable the I/O
scanning of individual devices.
Disabling I/O scanning with the Device Control Block is equivalent to ending communication
between the scanner and the device.
33002479 10/2019 205

Therefore:
 The fallback positions are applied to the inputs by the scanner.
 Communication with the device stops.
 All entries in the IN and OUT tables still transfer between the CPU and the scanner on each
scan.
As a consequence of the last point above, if you modify a %MWi attached to an input, this %MWi
is overwritten by the values coming from the I/O scanner in the next scan (with either 0 or the last
input value).
It is possible (but meaningless) to access %MW attached to the outputs because they are not
transmitted to the device.

The Repetitive Rate Step (number 3 in previous figure) is set in multiples of 5 ms (the minimum)
through 200 ms (the maximum).
The Repetitive Rate column is where you enter a rate of time for how often you want the I/O
scanner to send a query to the device after the rate has timed out.
NOTE: The repetitive rate of the I/O scanner table is a multiple of the rate displayed in the
Repetitive Rate Step. The real repetitive rate being executed by the I/O scanner service is shown
in the Repetitive Rate column.
NOTE: An entry in the Repetitive Rate column is rounded up to the next multiple that was entered
in the Repetitive Rate Step if the entry is not a multiple of the Repetitive Rate Step.
For example, if the entry in the Repetitive Rate Step is 5 and you enter a 7 in the Repetitive Rate
column, the 7 is rounded up to 10; if you change the Repetitive Rate Step to 6 and enter a 7 in the
Repetitive Rate column, the 7 is rounded up to 12.
206 33002479 10/2019

I/O Scanner Table Parameters

The I/O Scanner parameters are described in the table below:
Parameter Description Example

Entry # This is the first column; it has no name.
Valid range: 1 ... 128
Each entry represents an I/O Scanning exchange on the
network.
IP address This is the IP address of the scanned Ethernet slave 192.168.1.100
device.
Device Name To configure a device (Advantys island or DTM), click the MySTB1 or
... button to open the Property box (see page 224) to start Master_PRM_DTM_10
the device configuration software.
For an introduction to this procedure for Advantys, go
here (see page 214).
For an introduction to this procedure for DTMs, go to FDT
Container (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating
Modes).
NOTE: While the Property box is open, I/O scanning
cannot be edited.
Unit ID This field associates the slave address of the device 255
connected to an Ethernet/Modbus gateway with the IP
address of that gateway:
 Value range: 1 to 255
 Default value: 255
NOTE:
 When using a bridge, enter the bridge index (1 to 255)
in this field.
 If you are copying the I/O scanning configuration from
a 140 NOE 771 •• to a 140 NOC 771 ••, set the Unit ID
to a value from 1 to 254.
Slave Syntax Use this drop-down menu to pick the way RD Ref Slave Index (default value)
and WR Ref Slave values are displayed. There are 4
types of display available:
 Index: 100
 Modbus: 400101
 (Modbus register)
 IEC 0: %MW100
 M340 and Premium PLC slaves
 IEC 1: %MW101
 Quantum PLC slaves
33002479 10/2019 207


Health Timeout This field sets the maximum interval between the 1500 ms
(ms) responses from a remote device. After this time period
expires, the received data is invalid. The Health Timeout
should be longer than the Repetitive rate time (ms).
For a Quantum NOE Ethernet module, it also should be
longer than the CPU scan time.
For the Health Timeout:
 Range: 0ms to 65535 ms
 Interval: 1ms
Repetitive rate The rate at which data is scanned, from 0...65535 in 60 ms

(ms) multiples of the Repetitive Rate Step:
 If you are running Unity Pro V3.1 or earlier with the
following firmware versions:
 140 NOE (V4.0 or earlier): 16 ms
 CPU (V2.5 or lower): 10 ms
 If you are running Unity Pro V4.0 or later with the

following firmware versions:
 140 NOE (V4.3 or later): 5 - 200 ms
 CPU (V2.6 or later): 5 - 200 ms
NOTE: Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert

for version 13.1 or earlier.
RD Master Destination address in the master PLC where, from each %mw10
Object* device, newly read information is stored
RD Slave Ref.** Source address index in the slave/remote device The format of this value
depends on the Slave Syntax:
 Index: 5
 Modbus: 400006
 IEC 0: %MW5
 IEC 1: %MW6
RD length Number of words to read 10

Last value This field configures the behavior of inputs in the event of Hold last
(Input) an access error in relation to the remote device (for
NOTE: When you select hold
example: inoperative network or device power supply,
last in a 140 CPU 651 •0
etc.):
coprocessor, the input data
 Set to 0: fall back to 0
may fall back to 0 when the I/O
 Hold last: maintain last value
scanner health bits are NOT
OKAY. Confirm that the I/O
scanner health bits are valid
(OK=1) before removing the
Ethernet cable to maintain hold
last value.
208 33002479 10/2019


WR Master Source address of the master PLC whose data is being %mw20
Object* written into the slave/remote device.
Write operations are always performed at the word level.
WR Slave The address of the first word written into the slave/remote The format of this value
Ref.** device. depends on the Slave Syntax:
 Index: 1
 Modbus: 400002
 IEC 0: %MW1
 IEC 1: %MW2
WR length Number of words to be written 10

Gateway/Bridge To allow slower TCP/IP network devices (i.e., gateways
Device and bridges) to be compatible with the I/O Scanner:
 Select the check box to enable this feature. Defines a
new bit, and sets it to high (1).
 De-select the check box to disable this feature
(default). Defines a new bit, and sets it to zero (0).
Description Additional information
*Master refers to the client PLC that makes the request.
**Slave refers to the server from which data is read or to which data is written.
NOTE: For more information, refer to the Contextual Menu for Copy/Cut/Paste topic
(see page 210).
NOTE: For more information, refer to the I/O Scanning with Multiple Lines topic (see page 212).
33002479 10/2019 209

I/O Scanning Contextual Menu for Copy/Cut/Paste
At a Glance
A right-click on a line in the I/O Scanning table opens the I/O Scanning Contextual Menu. Use this
menu to perform common operations on the lines of the I/O Scanning table, such as, delete a
device, copy & paste, cut & paste, insert a new line, etc.
Contextual Menu
The following illustration is the I/O Scanning contextual menu:
The following table describes the menu functions:
Menu Item Description

Delete Device For an ACS or PRA configuration, Delete Device permanently deletes
the Device Name and all its data (and associated ACS symbols).
For a PRM Master DTM, its link to the I/O Scanning table is deleted,
NOTE: Deleting a PRM Master DTM link from the I/O Scanning table
does not delete the corresponding DTM from the connectivity tree in
the DTM Browser.
Cut line(s) Cut line(s) copies and deletes the selected I/O Scanning lines. The
lines are copied without the Device Name information.
For an ACS or PRA configuration, it permanently deletes the Device
Name and all its data (and associated ACS symbols).
For a PRM Master DTM, the link between the DTM and the I/O
Scanning line is removed.
Copy line(s) Copy line(s) copies the selected lines, but without the Device Name.
Paste line(s) Paste line(s) has 2 actions depending on its target line:
 If the line is empty, it fills the line with the copied line (without a
Device Name)
 If the line is not empty, it replaces the line with the copied line
(without a Device Name).
Be careful, it also permanently deletes the Device Name link to the
I/O Scanning table and, for an ACS or PRA configuration, all its
data (and associated ACS symbols) of the old line before replacing
it with the copied line.
210 33002479 10/2019

Menu Item Description

Insert copied line(s) Insert copied line(s) inserts the copied line between the selected line
and the line just above it.
Be careful with ACS or DTM configurations, all the lines below the
inserted line become desynchronized. To synchronize these lines,
open and close the device configuration tool, then do an Update from
the Property box (see page 224).
Insert empty line Insert empty line inserts an empty line above the line selected line.
Inserting an empty line does not desynchronize the devices below the
line, but using this line for a new device can, depending the number of
words needed, desynchronize the devices below the line.
Pack all lines Pack all lines removes any empty lines between the top of the I/O
Scanning table and the last non-empty of the table.
33002479 10/2019 211

I/O Scanning with Multiple Lines
At a Glance
Modbus exchanges are limited to a maximum of 125 input words and 100 output words. If an
application needs to exchange more than these limits for a device, more than one I/O Scanning
line can be used: multiple lines for one device.
When the length is higher than the authorized limit for one Modbus exchange, the length is divided
into 2 or more Modbus exchanges. New lines are created for each Modbus exchanges with the
PLC.
The following I/O Scanning table is used for the multiple device lines example:
NOTE: This example shows an Advantys island, but DTM and PRA devices work the same way.
Multiple Line Length Configuration Example

In this example, the first (the main) I/O Scanning line 2 contains all the information for the
exchanges with the device including the totals for the RD length and WR length.
The second line 2 contains the specific word lengths (125 and 100) needed so that it can also be
used for part of the exchanges.
Line 2 needs a RD length of 300 word and a WR length of 110 words. How many extra lines are
needed?
 RD length = 300/125 = 2.72 = 3 lines needed
 WR length = 110/100 = 1.10 = 2 lines needed
The larger of the 2 numbers is used:

 Three lines are needed to accommodate the RD length: 125 words, 125 words, 50 words for a
total of 300 words
 The 3 lines for the WR length are: 100 words, 10 words, 0 words for a total of 110 words
The second line 2, line 3, and line 4 correspond to the Modbus exchange queries.
When multiple lines are used, only the RD length and WR length columns of these new lines can
be edited. In the case of Advantys or DTM, the software supplies the RD length and the WR length,
and they cannot be changed in the I/O Scanning table.
NOTE: It is not necessary to have a Device Name defined to use multiple lines.
212 33002479 10/2019

The total number of words allowed in an I/O Scanning table is:

 4 KW for Premium extended and Quantum networks
 2 KW for Premium ETY and M340 NOE modules
Line Length for Multiple Word Variables

When using variables with 2 or more words, adjust the RD and WR lengths so that a variable is not
partly on one I/O Scanning line and partly on the next. Because the 2 newly created lines result in
2 independent Modbus exchanges that can be sent non-synchronized to the device. The variables
can receive the wrong values (if the 2 parts are received at different times). It may be necessary
to use a RD length < 125 and a WR length < 100 for some of the scanned lines, in order to get
each variable on only one exchange line.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR
Verify that multiple word variables are completely on the same I/O Scanning line to avoid sending
parts of a variable data in 2 non-synchronized I/O Scanning Modbus exchanges.
33002479 10/2019 213

Introduction to Configuring Advantys from Control Expert
At a Glance
The Advantys Configuration Software (ACS) is integrated in Control Expert. This allows you to
configure Advantys STB and OTB islands from the Control Expert Ethernet I/O scanning tab.
Configuring an Advantys Island
WARNING
Always launch ACS from Control Expert in order to synchronize variables and data between
Control Expert and ACS.
WARNING
Stop the PLC before transferring an ACS configuration and/or I/O scanning modifications.
The following procedure configures an Advantys STB or OTB island:
Step Action Results

1 Open the Ethernet network configuration screen.
2 In the Module Utilities zone select YES for IO Scanning.
3 Select the I/O Scanning tab. I/O Scanning screen opens.
4 Enter, on a free line, the IP address for the connection you
want to use to communicate with the Advantys island.
5 Enter RD length and WR length on the same line. The
lengths must be long enough for the expected Advantys
configuration.
6 Validate the I/O Scanning screen.
7 Click on the ... button (that is next to Device Name cell on the The Property box (see page 224)
same line). opens.
8 Select STB or OTB in the Device Type drop-down menu.
9 Enter a Device Name (following the naming rules
(see page 227)).
214 33002479 10/2019

Step Action Results

10 You have 2 choices: Results for both 1. and 2. are:
1. If you want to go to ACS now to configure an island, click  A Control Expert message
on the Launch Advantys Configuration Software button. box opens: “The device name
Click on Yes in the “Confirm device name and type” and device type won’t be
Message Box and go to Step 11. modifiable. Do you want to
confirm the device name and
2. If you want to configure the Advantys island later, click on device type?”
the OK button.  The Device Type and Device
Click on Yes in the “Confirm device name and type” Name are verified and saved.
Message Box.  The Property box closes.
To open the ACS later:
 Carry out Step 7.
 Click on the Launch Advantys Configuration Software
button.
11 After ACS opens, configure your Advantys island.
NOTE: While the ACS is open Ethernet screen is locked and
cannot be edited, but the other Control Expert services can
be edited.
NOTE: The User Defined Label must be filled in the IO
image. If not, the Advantys varialble will no be added in the
Control Expert Data Editor.
12 When your Advantys island has been built and validated, A Control Expert message box
close ACS. opens “Do you want to update
your symbols now?”
13 You have 2 choices:
1. Click on Yes in the “update” Message Box and go to Step
14. If you clicked on No:
 You are returned to I/O
2. Click on No in the “update” Message Box. Scanning without carrying out
You are returned to the I/O Scanning screen without the results in Step 14.
carrying out the Yes results.  The Device Name is
Later, when you want to update the Advantys symbols displayed in the I/O Scanning
into Control Expert: in red. This indicates that the
 Carry out Step 7 island configuration has not
 In the Property box, click on the Update button and go been synchronized with
to Step 14. Control Expert.
33002479 10/2019 215

Step Action Results

14 Your Advantys island configuration is being synchronized The results are:
with Control Expert.  The Advantys island
After the synchronization is finished, you are returned to I/O modifications are
Scanning. Verify that the Device Name is now displayed in synchronized with the Control
black. Expert application.
 The Advantys island symbols
are imported into the Control
Expert Data Editor.
 The Advantys Device Name is
displayed in the I/O Scanning
in black. This indicates that
the island configuration is
synchronized.
15 Build your Control Expert application.
16 STOP the PLC.
17 Transfer:
 Control Expert application to the PLC
 STB or OTB configuration to the Advantys island using
ACS
18 RUN your application in the PLC.
Copy an Existing Island

This following procedure copies an existing Advantys island file (*.isl) into a new Advantys island
configuration:
Step Action
1 From Control Expert, open a new Advantys island in ACS.
2 In ACS, select File menu → Copy Island Contents.
3 In the Open island window, select the island file (*.isl) to copy.
4 Click on Yes in the “Do you want to proceed?” message box.
5 The message “Island file has been saved.” in the Log Window verifies that the operation was
successful.
216 33002479 10/2019

Copy an Island File to a New Location

The following procedure copies an Advantys island file (*.isl) to a new directory:
Step Action
1 In ACS, open an island configuration, for example, STB1.
2 Select File menu => Copy STB1 Contents
3 In the Copy STB1.isl to window, select the target directory.
4 The message “A copy of the island file has been saved with another name.” includes in the
Log Window verifies that the operation was successful. The name is new because its path has
changed.
33002479 10/2019 217

Introduction to Configuring the PRM Master DTM
At a Glance
The PRM Bus Master uses the Control Expert I/O Scanner to communicate with the CPU through
an Ethernet port. This requires configuring the PRM Master DTM in the Control Expert Ethernet I/O
Scanning tab.
Configuring a PRM Master DTM

The following procedure configures a PRM Master DTM in the I/O Scanner:
Step Action
1 Install the PRM Master DTM on the Host PC.
NOTE: After installing new DTMs, the Hardware Catalog must be updated.
2 Add a PRM Master DTM to the connectivity tree in the DTM Browser using the contextual Device
menu service.
3 In the DTM Browser, select the PRM Master and use the contextual Device menu function to
open the DTM PRM Offline Parameter screen.
4 In the General Setting part of this screen set the IP address of the PRM device.
5 Open the I/O Scanning configuration editor (tab).
6 In the Module Utilities zone select YES for IO Scanning.
7 Select the I/O Scanning tab.
Results: I/O Scanning configuration editor opens.
8 Enter, on a free line, the IP address for the connection to be used to communicate with the PRM
Bus Master.
9 Set correct values for the Read Ref. and Write Ref. parameters.
10 Enter RD length and WR length for the IP address line (within the Read Ref. and Write Ref.
constraints).
NOTE: The lengths must be long enough for the expected configuration PRM Master DTM and
its subnode DTMs.
12 Click on the ... button (next to Device Name cell).
Results: The Property box (see page 224) opens.
13 Select DTM in the Device Type drop-down menu.
14 Select the protocol in the DTM Protocol drop-down menu.
15 Select a PRM Master DTM in the DTM Name drop-down menu.
16 Click on OK to validate the choices you made.
Results:
 The Device Type, Device Protocol and Device Name are verified and saved.
 The Property box closes.
218 33002479 10/2019

Step Action
17 Update the I/O Scanning line, refer to Updating I/O Scanning for a PRM Master DTM
(see page 219).
18 Build the Control Expert application.
19 Stop the PLC.
20 Transfer the Control Expert application to the PLC.
21 In the DTM Browser, right click on PRM Master and select the Connect function.
22 In the DTM Browser, right click on PRM Master and select the Store data to device function.
23 Run the application in the PLC.
Updating I/O Scanning for a PRM Master DTM

The following procedure updates the I/O Scanning information for a PRM Master DTM:
Step Action
1 Configure and validate the PRM Bus Masters in the DTM Browser using the contextual Device
menu function.
2 Open the I/O Scanning configuration editor (tab).
3 Click on the ... button (that is next to the Device Name of the PRM Master DTM to update).
4 In the open Property box (see page 224), click on the Update button.
Results:
 The PRM Master DTM modifications are synchronized with the Control Expert application.
 The PRM Master DTM symbols are imported into the Control Expert Data editor.
 The DTM Name is displayed in the I/O Scanning configuration tab in black. This indicates that
the PRM configuration is synchronized.
 The Property box closes.
33002479 10/2019 219

Introduction to Configuring a BMX PRA 0100 from Control Expert
At a Glance
Control Expert allows configuration of BMX PRA 0100 modules through the Ethernet I/O scanning
tab. The PRA device configuration is done in a second instance of Control Expert.
Configuring a PRA
The following procedure configures a PRA device:
Step Action Results

1 Open the Ethernet network configuration screen.
2 In the Module Utilities zone select YES for IO
Scanning.
3 Select the I/O Scanning tab. I/O Scanning screen opens.
4 Enter, on a free line, the IP address for the
connection you want to use to communicate with the
PRA.
NOTE: The IP address in the I/O Scanning table
must be the same as the IP address of the PRA
device.
5 Enter RD length and WR length on the same line.
7 Click on the ... button (that is next to Device Name The Property box (see page 224) opens.
cell on the same line).
8 Select PRA in the Device Type drop-down menu.
9 Enter a Device Name (following the naming rules
(see page 227)).
220 33002479 10/2019

Step Action Results

10 You have 2 choices: Results for both 1. and 2. are:
1. If you want to now configure a PRA, click on the  A Control Expert message box opens:
Launch PRA button. “The device name and device type
Click on Yes in the “Confirm device name and won’t be modifiable. Do you want to
type” Message Box and go to Step 11. confirm the device name and device
type?”
2. If you want to configure a PRA later, click on the  The Device Type and Device Name
OK button. are verified and saved.
Click on Yes in the “Confirm device name and  The Property box closes.
type” Message Box.
NOTE: The Device Name becomes red in the
I/O Scanning table. This indicates that a PRA has
not been configured for the table line that
contains the Device Name
To configure a PRA later:
 Carry out Step 7.
 Click on the Launch PRA button.
NOTE: While the second PRA instance of Control

Expert is running no changes can be made to the
Ethernet Editor in the first (master) instance of
Control Expert.
11 After the second instance of Control Expert opens:
 File menu → Open
 Change the file type to .XEF
 Open the PRA application template,
PRA_Template.XEF
33002479 10/2019 221

Step Action Results

12 When your PRA application is configured:
 If desired, you can build the PRA application now.
 Save the application.
NOTE: The Save As function is not available. To
copy your PRA application use the Export or
Save Archive function.
 Close this instance of Control Expert.
NOTE: You are asked if you want to save the
PRA application in the master application *.stu
file. If you select No, all changes are lost.
NOTE: Later you can build your PRA application by
carrying out Step 7. Because the PRA application is
saved (embedded) in the master application *.stu
file, it is opened. You can then build the PRA
application.
NOTE: If there is no PRA application in the master
*.stu, an empty application is opened (as happens
the first time the Launch PRA button is used in the
Property box)
13 Build your Control Expert application.
14 STOP the PLC.
15 Transfer:
 Control Expert application to the PLC
 PRA configuration to the PRA device
NOTE: There are no imported variables, the
user must ensure the synchronization of the data
exchange.
16 RUN your application in the PLC.
NOTE: When the second (PRA) instance of Control Expert is closed, there is no indication if the
PRA application has been built or not.
222 33002479 10/2019

Copy an Existing PRA Application

This following procedure copies an existing PRA application:
Step Action
1 From the Control Expert I/O Scanning table using the ... button, open an existing PRA
application.
2 In the second Control Expert instance, save the existing PRA application with a new name as a
*.sta or .xef file.
3 Close this second Control Expert instance.
4 In the Control Expert I/O Scanning table create a new PRA application on a new line.
5 Import or Open the *.xef or *.sta file previously saved.
6 If desired, build the new PRA application and transfer it to the PRA device.
7 Close the second Control Expert instance.
33002479 10/2019 223

Property Box
At Glance
The Property box is the link between Control Expert and a device configuration tool. It is used to
select and name a device and to launch the configuration tool for the device.
Property Box
The following illustration is the Property box before selecting the Device Type.
For details on how top use the Property box, refer to:
 Advantys (see page 225)
 DTM (see page 228)
 BMX PRA 0100 (see page 226)
224 33002479 10/2019

Property Box for Advantys

This Property box allows you to choose the name and type of Advantys island to be configured
using the Advantys Configuration Software (ACS).
The following illustration is the Property box for Advantys after Device Type and Device Name
entered:
Property Box for Advantys Elements

The elements of the Advantys Property box are:
Element Description
Device Type Selection of a STB or OTB device is made from this drop-down list.
After the first validation (using the OK or Launch Advantys button) the Device Type
cannot be changed.
Device Name The Device Name (see page 227) is used as a prefix to all variables created for an
Advantys island in ACS. This allows unique variables for duplicated islands.
After validation (using the OK or Launch Advantys button) the Device Name cannot be
changed.
Data Exchange These are the minimum number of words necessary for communication between the
Required Control Expert module and the Advantys island.
These values cannot be changed via the Property box.
NOTE: Increasing the RD/WR lengths via the I/O Scanning tab leaves enough data
exchange words for the future expansion of your Advantys island. Expanding an island
that does not use the last line in the I/O Scanning table requires changing the values for
all the lines below the line that needs the additional exchange words.
Use Device Name If this checkbox is unchecked, the user is in charge of giving unique names to the
as prefix variables and symbols in all Advantys islands.
This checkbox is only available for ASC V5.5 or higher. For versions less than 5.5 the
Device Name is automatically added to all variables and symbols in all Advantys islands.
33002479 10/2019 225

Element Description
OK This button is only available after entering the Device Type and Device Name.
When clicked, the Device Type and Device Name are checked to see if they are valid.
If there is a problem, a message box opens explaining the why they were not valid.
OK is only available during the first use of the Property box for a new island.
Launch Advantys This button is only available if both:
Configuration  The Device Type and Device Name have been entered
Software  ACS is installed
This button does two things:

 It carries out the action of the OK button
 If there is no problem during validation, it launches ACS
Update When clicked, the ACS modifications are synchronized with your Control Expert
application (after these modifications have been validated in ACS).
It also imports and updates all ACS symbols and variables into the Control Expert
variable manager.
NOTE: All variables modified in ACS are deleted and rewritten in the Control Expert
Data Editor. But they are not updated in the program.
Close This button closes the Property box without saving anything.
Property Box for BMX PRA 0100

This Property box allows you to choose the name for the PRA module to be configured.
The following illustration is the Property box for the PRA after Device Name validation:
226 33002479 10/2019

Property Box for PRA Elements

The elements of the PRA Property box are:
Element Description
Device Type Selection of the PRA device is made from this drop-down list.
After the first validation (using the OK or Launch PRA button) the Device Type cannot
be changed.
Device Name The Device Name (see page 227) is the name of PRA application.
Data Exchange This is not used when configuring a PRA device.
Required
OK This button is only available after entering the Device Type and Device Name.
When clicked, the Device Type and Device Name are checked to see if they are valid.
If there is a problem, a message box opens explaining why they are not valid.
OK is only available during the first use of the Property box for a new PRA configuration.
Launch PRA This button is only available if the Device Type and Device Name has been entered.
This button does two things:
 It carries out the action of the OK button
 If there is no problem during validation, it launches another instance of Control
Expert, which is used to do the actual configuration of the PRA.
Close This button closes the Property box without saving anything.
Valid Name
A valid Device Name for a configuration:
 Does not already exist in the application
 Is not a empty name
 Starts with a letter
 Has a maximum of 8 characters
 Only ASCII characters, not Unicode characters
 Has no spaces
 Follows the Windows file naming conventions: no slashes, question marks, etc.
 Follows Control Expert variable naming conventions
33002479 10/2019 227

Property Box for a PRM Master DTM

This Property box allows you to choose the type and protocol for a PRM Master DTM:
The following illustration is the Property box after selecting the Device Type, DTM Protocol and
DTM Name:
Property Box PRM Master DTM Elements

The elements of the DTM Property box are:
Element Description
Device Type Selection of DTM device type is made from this drop-down list.
DTM Protocol Select the protocol to be used from this drop-down list.
This list contains the DTM protocols of all the DTMs in the DTM Browser that can be
linked with I/O Scanning.
Device Name Select a PRM Master DTM from this drop-down list.This list uses the DTM Browser Alias
names.
This list contains all the PRM Master DTMs in the DTM Browser that support the
selected DTM Protocol.
To validate the choices, click on the OK button.
Data Exchange These are the minimum number of words necessary for communication between Control
Required Expert and the PRM Master DTMs.
These values cannot be changed via the Property box.
NOTE: Increasing the RD/WR lengths via the I/O Scanning tab leaves enough data
exchange words for the future expansion of your DTM topology tree. Expanding a tree
that does not use the last line in the I/O Scanning table requires changing the values for
all the lines below the line that needs the additional exchange words.
228 33002479 10/2019

Element Description
OK The OK button is only available after selecting the Device Type, DTM Protocol and DTM
Name.
When clicked, the DTM Protocol and DTM Name are checked to see if they are valid.
If there is a problem, a message box opens explaining the why they were not valid.
The OK button is only available during the first use of the Property box for a new PRM
Master DTM.
Launch No Tool This button is never available for PRM Master DTMs.
Update Use the Update button after validating or changing the configuration of the linked PRM
Master DTM. Refer to Update I/O Scanning for a PRM Master DTM (see page 219).
Close The Close button closes the Property box without saving anything.
33002479 10/2019 229

Saving an Advantys Configuration in an Control Application
At a Glance
ACS saves an island configuration in an *.isl file. To add the island to an application, it is necessary
for Control Expert to know the location of the island configuration information.
Saving the Configuration

The recommended way to save your island configuration information is to save your Control Expert
application as a *.stu or *.sta file. The *.isl file is automatically included in these files.
Uploading or Importing
There are 2 situations where the information contained in the *.isl file is not available:
1. Uploading the application running in the PLC
2. Importing an *.xef file
In these 2 cases, if ACS is launched from the Property box (see page 224), it automatically tries to
open the latest Device Name.isl file the Control Expert General Path => Project Path directory:
 If the same PC is used for the import (upload) and export (download) and the Control Expert
Project Path has not changed, the island configuration is synchronized with ACS.
 If the same PC is not used for the import (upload) and export (download) or if the Control Expert
Project Path has changed, either:
 Create a new island
 Use the File menu => Copy Island Contents function
NOTE: The new Device Name.isl file is copied to the Project Path directory.
230 33002479 10/2019

Managed Variables
At a Glance
Variables of devices that are linked to Control Expert through I/O Scanning or DTM are managed
variables. They are created by the device configuration tool or by the DTM and are imported into
Control Expert. They are named as a concatenation of the Property box (see page 224) Device
Name + device symbol name.
Managed Variables in the Data Editor

Advantys symbols become managed variables when imported into Control Expert. An Advantys
managed variable name is a concatenation of:
the Advantys island name + Advantys symbol name.
This Data Editor illustration shows managed variables with their device name prefixes and their
Owner attributes:
Managed variables follow the usual rules for Control Expert and ACS or DTM naming.
The optional Owner column lists the owner attribute of the managed variables. This allows you to
filter the variables according to their Device Name.
The Control Expert managed variables are locked and cannot be modified through the Data Editor.
You have to use the device configuration tool (ACS or the DTM) to modify these variables.
33002479 10/2019 231

Importing Managed Variables from a Device (Advantys, DTM)

Using the Update button on the Property box (see page 224) imports the device Symbols into the
Data Editor as Control Expert managed variables.
In the case of a conflict between an device Symbol and an existing variable in the Data Editor:
 If the Control Expert variable is not managed, a message box allows you to replace this variable
with the managed variable coming from the ACS- or DTM-controlled device).
 If the Control Expert variable is already managed, the update is cancelled.
For an already managed variable, there are 2 options, either:

1. Use the device configuration tool (ACS or the DTM) to rename the variable.
2. Delete the old managed variable using the tool that manages the variable, then use the tool to
perform an Update.
After performing one of these options, use the Update button again on the device being updated
to complete the import without a conflict.
Permanent Deletion of a Managed Variable

Managed variables cannot be deleted directly from the Data Editor.
Removing a managed variable from a configuration must be done from the tool (ACS or the DTM)
that manages the device (either delete the device using the DTM or delete the Symbol using the
ACS).
NOTE: During an Update, all managed variables are deleted and recreated during synchronization
between Control Expert and the device.
Partial Import of a Managed Variable

Starting with Unity Pro V5.0, the managed variables become unmanaged during a partial import
from an .XSY file. This allows deletion of the variables if the linked device is not also imported.
After importing variables from an .XSY file, an Update is needed to resynchronize the managed
variables linked to a device. During this Update, a conflict box appears to allow validation of the
replacement managed variables.
232 33002479 10/2019

I/O Scanner Response Times: Remote Input to Remote Output
Measurement Setup
The set of curves below illustrates Quantum PLC response times when a signal is sent from a
remote input module to a remote output module through a Quantum PLC:
The signal is:

1 triggered by a Momentum input module with a response time of ~2 ms
2 scanned into the Quantum PLC at a repetitive rate of 0 ms
3 copied to another internal variable within the PLC
4 written to a Momentum output module with a response time of ~2 ms
33002479 10/2019 233

140 CPU 434 12A with 140 NOE 771 x1 Module

The 140 CPU 434 12A with an NOE 771 x1 (v3.3) was used for the following measurements:
The plot shows four lines representing the number of scanned devices:
 1 device
 8 devices
 16 devices
 32 devices
The four lines are indistinguishable at this scale because the response times are so similar. You
can see the similarity in the following table of data from which the above graph was plotted:
Number of Devices to Scan Time from Scanned Device Input to Scanned Device Output (ms)
434 12A + NOE 771 x1 (v3.3) 10 ms scan 20 ms scan 50 ms scan 100 ms scan 200 ms scan
1 device 41 73 179 358 665
8 devices 42 75 180 360 666
16 devices 44 77 182 361 668
32 devices 46 79 185 364 671
234 33002479 10/2019

140 CPU 65 150 with NOE 771 x1 (v3.3)

The 140 CPU 65 150 with an NOE 771 x1 (v3.3) is used used for the following measurements:
The plot shows four lines representing the number of scanned devices:
 1 device
 8 devices
 16 devices
 32 devices
The four lines are indistinguishable at this scale because the response times are so similar. You
can see the similarity in the following table of data from which the above graph was plotted:
Number of Devices to Scan Time from Scanned Device Input to Scanned Device Output (ms)
65150 + NOE 771x1 (v3.3) 10 ms scan 20 ms scan 50 ms scan 100 ms scan 200 ms scan
1 device 35 61 153 302 602
8 devices 36 62 154 303 603
16 devices 38 64 155 305 606
32 devices 40 66 157 307 609
33002479 10/2019 235

236 33002479 10/2019

Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 7
Introduction
This chapter covers the Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement service available
on the NOE 771 01 and -11 (Transparent Factory/Real Time modules) and HE CPU modules. The
Fast Device Replacement service offers you a method of handling device replacement without
disrupting the system or service.

Topic Page
Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement 238
Understanding Fast Device Replacement 240
Configuring Fast Device Replacement 242
33002479 10/2019 237

Overview
The address server provides two capabilities:
1. Standard BOOTP server behavior: Enter the MAC address and IP configuration. The NOE
BOOTP server will provide the IP configuration when the device sends a BOOTP request.
2. Fast Device Replacement (FDR) behavior: Enter the role name or the MAC address of the
device. The device will send its role name or the MAC address with its DHCP request. With the
DHCP response from the NOE, the device will receive its IP Configuration, plus the name and
location of a configuration file.
The next step for an FDR-compliant device is to download its configuration from the NOE.
NOTE: Consult your Schneider Electric sales representative for the current list of FDR-compliant
devices.
The address server in the NOE supports both modes at the same time. You select a mode by
entering either the MAC address or the role name in the Address Server Node Configuration
(see page 302) page. You may enter only one or the other, but not both.
The Fast Device Replacement capability allows automatic configuration of FDR-compliant devices.
Identifying a Role Name

Role names play an important role in Fast Device Replacement. A role name is a logical name that
the user assigns to a device, a logical name that has a meaning within the application. Example
role names might be:
 ENT_6: The sixth Momentum ENT in your application.
 OUTPUT_VALVE_2: The second output valve in your application
NOTE: Role names are case-sensitive.
Role Name
The logical role name should be written on devices. The technician can get the new device from
stores, enter the corresponding role name into the device, and place the device in the system. The
device automatically gets its configuration and starts running with no further input from the
technician. This process is designed to get your machine up and running quickly. All the technician
has to do for any FDR compliant device is to enter the role name into the new device.
238 33002479 10/2019

Address Server Limits

This table displays the parameters and limits of the address server:
Parameter Limit
Maximum number of address server entries 128
Maximum size of the configuration file per device 4K bytes
Total size of Fast Device Replacement storage 512K bytes
Maximum role name size 16 Characters
NOTE: For the DHCP server to work correctly the following must be observed.
 Address class and subnet class configured for the devices must match.
 Address class of the NOE and of the devices must be the same.
Operating on a Corporate Network

Keep these points in mind when operating on a corporate network:
 Before placing the NOE on a corporate network, Schneider Electric recommends that you
discuss the installation with your MIS department. It is likely that your company's corporate
network has at least one DHCP server running already. If the NOE's DHCP server is running on
the same network, it may disturb the network.
 To avoid any possible problem related to the NOE's DHCP server on the corporate network, you
have to ensure that the DHCP server is not running in the NOE by not having address entries
in the configuration. If there are no configured devices in the address server Configuration page,
then the NOE will not start the DHCP server.
Available FDR Agents

Three FDR agents are available:
 Momentum ENT
 Micro ETZ
 ATV58
The role-name.prm configuration files are stored in the NOE in non-volatile memory. Therefore,
after a power failure all configurations will be available.
BOOTP and DHCP Compatible Devices

Use either the MAC address or the role name (see page 303) to assign IP addresses. Therefore,
you may use the DHCP server with devices that support BOOTP only, such as Momentum ENT v1.
33002479 10/2019 239

Understanding Fast Device Replacement
Understanding Confirmation and Error Messages

In addition to highlighting errors, the system provides confirmation information and error
messages.
Confirmation Message If you successfully added, modified, or removed and entry, the following
alert message appears:
Error Messages Error messages, appearing as icons in the seventh column, display on the
Address Server Configuration page (see page 302), or in a dialog box.
Error Icon If an entry is not loaded in the DHCP server or loaded with a different configuration, an
icon of an exclamation point displays in the seventh column. The icon informs you of the
difference between the current and stored information.
 Not loaded in the server: A red icon displays.
 Duplicate configuration: A blue icon displays.

Place the pointer over the icon and a pop-up window appears and displays a message
 Not Loaded in the server:
 Present configuration:
240 33002479 10/2019

Error Dialog Box If you entered an existing role name or MAC address, you will receive an alert
message asking you to correct the entry.
Modifying the Database

If you need to add or modify an entry in the database, use the Address Server Configuration page
(see page 302). Three fields must be filled in:
 Device IP address
 Subnet Mask
 Gateway
Choose either the Role Name or Device MAC address field. When one field is selected, the other
is made unavailable.
Adding Entries If you are adding a device, the page appears with values. You need to enter either
a Role Name or a MAC Address.
If you are adding an entry, submit your selection using the Add the Entry button.
Modifying Entries If you are modifying an entry, the Device IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
fields display with the current configuration.
If you are modifying an entry, submit your selection using the Reset the Form button.
Each field of the Address Server Node Configuration page has restrictions, which are detailed
below.
 Role Name: Each role name must be unique. Only letters, numerals, and underscores are
allowed. No more than 16 characters are allowed, and no spaces are allowed.
 Device MAC Address: This address must be in hexadecimal format and six (6) bytes long (6x2
characters). The MAC address can be entered with or without a delimiting character between
each pair of lower- or upper-case hexadecimal characters. The delimiting characters improve
readability. There are three choices for a delimiting character:
 Space " " (spacebar)
 Colon ":"
 Hyphen "-"
 Device IP Address: The IP address must use the standard numeric Internet Protocol address
that uniquely identifies each computer on the network. The IP address is a 32-bit identifier made
up of four groups of numbers (from 0 through 255), each number separated by a period, for
example 123.456.78.9.
 Subnet Mask: The subnet mask must be entered in IP address format.
 Gateway: The gateway must be entered in IP address format. The gateway must be on the
same subnet as the device.
33002479 10/2019 241

Configuring Fast Device Replacement
Configuring the Address Server

To configure the Address Server you use Web pages generated by the embedded Web server.
The first page that appears is the Address Server Configuration page. The first column contains
buttons used for selecting devices. The Address Server Configuration page displays configuration
information for each device in the system and has seven columns in the table.
Displayed on this page is information about:
 Role Name
 MAC Address
 IP Address
 Subnet Mask
 Gateway
An additional, unnamed column indicates any difference between the current and stored
configuration. If a difference exists, an exclamation point is displayed.
This is the Address Server Configuration page. In this sample page, the configured and stored
configurations are the same for each device.
On the Address Server Configuration page you can:

 Add a New Entry
 Change an Entry
 Delete an Entry
 Refresh the data table
242 33002479 10/2019

Choosing Options
The Address Server Configuration page allows you to choose different options for adding or
altering the configurations of your NOE. The options available to you are:
 select an entry
 add an entry
 change an entry
 delete an entry
Below we describe the method and options chosen to perform any of the four options listed above.
Screen shots are presented to accompany the Adding an entry section.
Selecting an Entry When the page displays, by default no entries are selected. Use the radio
buttons in the first column to select an entry. Only one entry may be selected at a time.
Adding an Entry When the Add a New Entry button is selected, the Address Server Node
Configuration page appears. This page displays information about a device.
If you selected a device, this page displays the device’s configuration. Configuration information
appears in four of the five fields of the dialog box. Only the Role information field is blank. You
should enter a Role name, for example ENT_7.
If no device is selected, default values appear in each field.
Changing an Entry Before using this button, you must select an entry in the database by choosing
one of the radio buttons in the first column. If you do not choose an entry, a message appears.
When the Change an Entry button is selected, the Address Server Node Configuration page
appears. The information displayed is for the device selected.
Deleting an Entry Before using this button, select an entry in the database by choosing one of the
radio buttons in the first column. If you do not choose an entry, a message appears.
The entry selected will be removed from the database. Before completely deleting an entry, a
warning message appears. Click Yes if you want to delete the entry, No if you don’t.
33002479 10/2019 243

If you click Yes, a dialog box appears.
Click OK. Another dialog box appears notifying you that the deletion was successful.
Highlighting Anomalies
If there are anomalies with the entered configuration parameter information, the system indicates
anomalies using a highlighting mechanism. Valid device configurations appear in purple and italic.
A device with configuration anomalies appears in red and bold.
The system detects the following anomalies:
 Bad Role Name
The valid Role Name characters are:
 a through z (lower case)
 A through Z (upper case)
 "_" (underscore)
 Bad MAC Address

The valid MAC Address characters are:
 0 through 9
 A through F
 Wrong IP Address
 Wrong Subnet Mask
 Wrong Gateway
 Double Entry
Each entry needs a unique Role Name or MAC Address. If a duplicate Role Name or MAC
Address is entered, the system highlights the duplication.
244 33002479 10/2019

Erroneous entries are not loaded into the DHCP server. Therefore, correct erroneous before
loading. There are two ways of correcting the erroneous entries:
 Correcting through Web page: Make the changes on the Web page and submit the change.
 Correcting through the Address Server configuration file: Make the changes in the file and
reboot the server.
33002479 10/2019 245

246 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 8
Network Management Service (SNMP)
Network Management Service (SNMP)
Introduction
The following material describes SNMP and the Schneider private MIB. Under the Schneider
private MIB is the Transparent Factory Ethernet private MIB.

Topic Page
SNMP 248
ASN.1 Naming Scheme 250
Configuring an NOE with SNMP 252
Configuring an NOE with TFE Private MIB 254
33002479 10/2019 247

SNMP
SNMP
Introduction
This topic describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), which is configured on
your NOE or 140 CPU 651 x0. Network management software allows a network manager to:
 monitor and control network components
 isolate problems and identify their causes
 query the status of devices such as a host computer, routers, switches, and bridges
 obtain statistics about the networks to which devices are connected
Manager/Agent Paradigm
Network management software follows the conventional client-server model. To avoid confusion
with other network communication protocols that use the client/server terminology, network
management software uses the following terms:
 manager: the client application that runs on the manager’s computer
 agent: the application that runs on a network device
The manager uses conventional transport protocols (for example, TCP or UDP) to establish
communication with the agent. Managers and agents then exchange requests and responses
according to the network management protocol.

Your NOE module is configured with SNMP, which is the standard protocol used to manage a local
area network (LAN). SNMP defines exactly how a manager communicates with an agent.
The SNMP defines the format of the requests that a manager sends to an agent and the format of
the replies that the agent returns to the manager.
The MIB
Each SNMP object has to be defined and given a unique name. Both the manager and agent
programs must agree on the names and the meanings of the fetch and store operations. The set
of all objects SNMP can access is known as a Management Information Base (MIB).
Private MIB
Schneider obtained a private MIB, Groupe_Schneider (3833). Under the Groupe Schneider private
MIB is a Transparent Factory Ethernet (TFE) private MIB. The Transparent Factory SNMP
embedded component controls the Schneider private MIB function.
248 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
Choosing an SNMP Manager

If you already have a working SNMP manager, you may continue to use it. Any of the many SNMP
version 1-compliant managers on the market will work.
If you do not currently use an SNMP manager in your organization and are evaluating SNMP
managers for purchase, then we recommend that you consider HiVision with the ConnexView Add-
On developed for use with Schneider Electric PLCs.
Please contact your Schneider Electric sales office for availability and pricing of HiVision and
ConnexView.
Using an SNMP Manager

The process for obtaining an SNMP manager:
Step Action
1 Get Schneider .mib file from the NOE Web page.
Find the .mib file as a packed file under /wwwroot/SchneiderTFE.zip on your NOE
module.
2 Load .mib file to the SNMP manager.
3 When you are done, you will see the Schneider private MIB manager in your
manager.
Other SNMP Resources

SNMP and related subjects are well-documented on Web sites and in many books:
 As of this writing, a useful description appears on Microsoft’s Technet pages.
Browse to http://www.microsoft.com/technet. Use the Search function to find "Network
Management for Microsoft Networks Using SNMP."
 Use an Internet search engine to search for an SNMP introduction, tutorial, or other resource.
 The SNMP FAQs from the news group comp.protocols.snmp appear on many .com and
.org Web pages. Search for the combination of "comp.protocols.snmp" and "FAQ."
33002479 10/2019 249

SNMP
ASN.1 Naming Scheme
ASN.1 Overview
Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1) is a formal language for abstractly describing messages to
be exchanged between distributed computer systems.
An Example
Objects in a MIB are defined with the ASN.1 naming scheme that assigns each object a long prefix
that guarantees that the name will be unique. For example, an integer that counts the number of
IP datagrams that a device has received is named: iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib.ip.ipinReceives.
The following figure depicts the ASN.1 naming scheme example.
This object name is represented in an SNMP message by assigning each part an integer. So, the
above message would appear as 1.3.6.1.2.2.4.3.
250 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
Each integer has the following meaning:

 1 = ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
 3 = identified organization (one of branches under the ISO root)
 6 = U. S. Department of Defense (DoD) (one of the children under branch1.3)
 1 = the Internet subtree under 1.3.6
 2 = the mgm branch — (one of seven) of the Internet subtree. It is managed by the Internet
Assigned Numbers Authority, and includes the standard MIBs
 2 = mib-2(1) group of managed objects
 4 = ip (the mib-2(1) IP group (one of 11))
 3 = ipinReceives (the MIB object)
33002479 10/2019 251

SNMP
Configuring an NOE with SNMP
Object Identifier (OID)

In the ASN.1 Naming Scheme example (see page 250), the MIB object identified by the notation
1.3.6.1.2.2.4.3 is referred to as the Object Identifier or OID. All OIDs can be seen as part of a tree
structure that begins at the root (ISO) and branches out with each subtree identified by an integer.
SNMP Protocol Data Units

SNMP uses protocol data units (PDUs) to carry the requests and responses, between the manager
and the agents, for the information contained in an OID.
As the following figure shows, the SNMP message is the innermost part of a typical network
transmission frame.
The PDUs within the SNMP initiate the communication between the manager and the agents.
The SNMP installed on your NOE module uses the following three PDUs:
 GetRequest
 SetRequest
 Trap
GetRequest PDU
The GetRequest (shortened to Get) PDU is used by the SNMP manager to retrieve the value of
one or more objects (OIDs) from an agent.
SetRequest PDU
The SetRequest (shortened to Set) PDU is used by the SNMP manager to assign a value to one
or more objects (OIDs) residing in an agent.
Trap PDU
The Trap PDU is used by the agent to alert the manager that a predefined event has occurred.
252 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
Version & Community Identifiers

The version identifies the version number of the SNMP software being used by the manager and
the agent. Your NOE supports Version 1 of the SNMP. The community is an identifier that you
assign to your SNMP network. If community names for the manager and the agent do not agree,
the agent will send an authentication failure trap message to the manager. If the community names
and version number agree, the SNMP PDU will be processed.
What Can Be Configured

Your NOE module can be configured to send an authentication trap to two SNMP managers if it
receives a community name in a Get/Set request that does not match the configured name. Also,
you can configure the SysContact and SysLocation via the configuration page in the module’s
embedded web pages. After making changes in the SNMP Configuration Web page and to set
those changes, reboot the module using hot swap.
33002479 10/2019 253

SNMP
Configuring an NOE with TFE Private MIB
Introduction
A MIB, a Management Information Base, is an element used in network management. Network
management services are based on the need to monitor and manage:
 performance
 fault occurrences
 security
Each MIB contains a finite number of objects. Manage your MIB with a management station
running an SNMP management application. The management application uses GETs and SETs
to retrieve system information and to set system environment variables.
Schneider Private MIB

Schneider Electric obtained a Private Enterprise Number (PEN) from the Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority (IANA). That number represents a subtree in the SNMP MIB, a number that is
a unique identifier used for Groupe Schneider.
The object identifier for the root of the Groupe Schneider subtree is 1.3.6.1.4.1.3833 and
represents a path to the subtree as follows:
iso(1)
org(3)
dod(6)
internet(1)
private(4)
enterprise(1)
GroupeSchneider(3833)
Transparent_Factory_Ethernet(1)
Under the GroupeSchneider private MIB is a Transparent Factory Ethernet (TFE) private MIB,
Transparent_Factory_Ethernet(1).
TFE Private MIB

The Transparent Factory SNMP-embedded component controls the Schneider private MIB
function. The Schneider private MIB, and associated services, perform Network Management on
all system components. The Transparent Factory private MIB provides the data to manage the
main Transparent Factory communication services for all the communication components of the
Transparent Factory architecture (ETYs, NOEs, third party toolkit, ENTs, M1Es). The Transparent
Factory private MIB does not define the specific management applications and policies.
254 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
The diagram following illustrates the Schneider Electric (Groupe_Schneider (3833)) private
enterprise MIB subtree.
The Groupe_Schneider (3833) subtree is the root of Groupe Schneider's private MIB in the
Structure of Management Information (SMI) used by SNMP and defined in RFC-1155, which is a
specification that defines the structure and identification of management information for TCP/IP-
based networks.
33002479 10/2019 255

SNMP
Transparent Factory Ethernet Subtree

The Transparent_Factory_Ethernet (1) subtree defines groups that support the Transparent
Factory Ethernet services and devices.
Service Subtree Definition

Switch(1) brand of switches labeled: ConneXium switches private MIB
Port502_Messaging(2) objects for managing explicit client/server communications supporting applications,
such as HMI, SCADA, or programming tools
I/O_Scanning(3) objects for managing I/O device communications that use the I/O Scanner
mechanism with the MB/TCP protocol
Global_Data(4) objects for managing the application coordination service using a publish/subscribe
protocol
Web(5) objects for managing the activity of the embedded Web servers
Address_Server(6) objects for managing the activity of the BOOTP and (or) DHCP servers
Equipment_Profiles(7) objects for each type of device in Transparent Factory Ethernet's product portfolio
timeManagement(8) objects for managing the UTC time stamp service
email(9) objects for managing the mail service
Device subtrees, or groups, will be defined for the following devices:

 Premium(1)
 Quantum(2)
 Generic_Device(3)
 M1E(4)
 ENT(5)
As devices are added to Schneider's catalog, Schneider's private MIB will be extended in the
following manner:
 If needed, a Transparent Factory, communication-service object will be added for the new
device in the corresponding Equipment_Profiles(7) subtree. This subtree can hold as many
objects as are required.
 If needed, a new branch will be added at the same level as Transparent_Factory_Ethernet(1).
This subtree will be created for product-specific objects (such as the ATV58 object under the
IndustrialControlProducts (3) subtree).
When a new device is created, a corresponding object description is created in the ASN.1 format.
The ASN.1 file(s) are then given to producers of SNMP manager software for inclusion in their
products.
256 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
Port502 Messaging Subtree

The Port502_Messaging (2) subtree, or group, provides connection management and data flow
services. The following list describes the function of each object.
Service Indicates . . .
port502Status(1) status of the service (idle, operational)
port502SupportedProtocol(2) supported protocols (MODBUS, Xway)
port502IpSecurity(3): status of the Port502 IP Security service (enabled/disabled)
port502MaxConn(4) maximum number of TCP connections supported by the Port502 entity
port502LocalConn(5) TCP connection number currently opened by the local Port502 entity
port502RemConn(6) TCP connection number currently opened by the remote entity to the local
Port502 entity
port502IpSecurityTable(7) a table containing the number of unsuccessful TCP connection open tries from
a remote TCP entity
port502ConnTable(8) a table containing Port502 TCP specific information (MsgIn, MsgOut)
port502MsgIn(9) total number of Port502 messages received from the network
port502MsgOut(10) total number of Port502 messages sent from the network
port502MsgOutErr(11) total number of error messages built by the Port502 messaging entity and sent
to the network
port502AddStackStat(12) the support of additional port502 stack statistics:
 1 - disabled
 2 - enabled
port502AddStackStatTable(13) additional stack statistics for Port502 (optional)
I/O Scanning Subtree

The I/O_Scanning (3) subtree, or group, contains the objects related to I/O scanning device
management and associated MODBUS communications on Port502.
ioScanStatus(1) global status of the I/O scanning service:
 1 - idle
 2 - operational
 3 - stopped
ioScanMaxDevice(2) maximum number of devices supported by the I/O scanning entity

ioScanPolledDevice(3) number of devices currently polled by the I/O scanning entity
ioScanTransSend(4) total number of transactions sent by the I/O scanning entity
ioScanGlbHealth(5) global status of health for the I/O scanning service:
 2 - OK: Every remote I/O device is responding
 4- Warning: At least one remote I/O device is not responding
ioScanDeviceTable(6) a table containing information on each remote devices polled by the I/O scanning entity
33002479 10/2019 257

SNMP
Global Data Subtree

The Global_Data (4) subtree, or group, contains the objects related to the Global Data service.
glbDataStatus(1) global status of the Global Data service:
 1 - idle
 2 - operational
 3 - stopped
glbDataMaxPub(2) maximum number of published variables configured by the Global Data entity
glbDataMaxSub(3) maximum number of subscribed variables configured by the Global Data entity
glbDataPub(4) total number of publications sent to the network
glbDataSub(5) total number of subscriptions received from the network
glbDataPubErr(6) total number of publication errors detected by the local entity
glbDataSubErr(7) total number of subscription errors detected by the local entity
glbDataGlbSubHealth(8) global status of health for the Global Data subscribed variables:
 2 - OK: The health status of all subscribed variables is OK
 4 - Warning: At least one subscribed variable has a health fault
glbDataPubTable(9) a table containing information on each published variable (the number of publications,
the source IP address, the number of errors)
glbDataSubTable(10) a table containing information on each subscribed variable (the number of subscriptions,
the source IP address, the number of errors, Health)
Web Subtree
The Web (5) subtree, or group, contains the objects related to the Web server service.
webStatus(1) global status of the Web service:
 1 - idle
 2 - operational
webPassword (2) switch to enable or disable the use of Web passwords:

 1 - disabled
 2 - enabled
webSuccessfullAccess (3) total number of successful accesses to the Web site

webFailedAttempts (4) total number of unsuccessful accesses to the Web site
258 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
Address Server Subtree

The Address_Server (6) subtree, or group, contains the objects related to the Address Server
service. The Address Server can be either a BOOTP server or a DHCP server.
addressServerStatus(1) global status of the address server service:
 1 - idle
 2 - operational
Equipment Profile Subtree

The Equipment_Profiles (7) subtree contains a set of common objects.
profileProductName(1) the commercial name of the communication product in a string form (for
example, 140 NOE 771 11)
profileVersion(2) the software version of the communication product in a string form (for
example, Vx.y or V1.1)
profileCommunicationServices(3) the communication services supported by the profile (Port502Messaging, I/O
scanning Messaging, Global Data, Web, and Address Server)
profileGlobalStatus(4) the global status of the communication module:
 1 - NOK
 2 - OK
profileConfigMode(5) the IP configuration mode of the communication module:

 1 - Local: The IP configuration is created locally
 2 - dhcpServed: The IP configuration is created by a remote DHCP server
profileRoleName(6) rthe ole name for the IP address management if it exists (empty string if there
is none)
profileBandwidthMgt(7) the status of Bandwidth Management:
 1 - disabled
 2 - enabled
profileBandwidthDistTable(8) the CPU time distribution between Global Data, Port502 Messaging, I/O
scanning
profileLedDisplayTable(9) a table giving the name and the state of each module’s LEDs
profileSlot(10) the position of the communication module inside the rack if there is one. If
there is no rack, the profileSlot value will be zero
profileCPUType(11) the host for which that communication module is a part when a CPU type
exists (if there is no host, the string is empty)
profileTrapTableEntriesMax(12) the maximum numbers of entries in the Trap Table (equal to the number of
possible remote managers)
profileTrapTable(13) a table allowing you to enable or disable the private traps for each of the
communication services
33002479 10/2019 259

SNMP
profileSpecificId(14) a unique Profile Specific Identification inside the equipmentProfile object of
the Schneider Transparent Factory MIB (for example, the PLC Premium
family is 100)
profileIpAddress(15) the IP address of the SNMP agent
profileIpNetMask(16) the subnet mask associated with the IP address of the SNMP agent (the value
of the mask is an IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the host
bits set to 0)
profileIpGateway(17) the default Gateway IP address of the SNMP agent
profileMacAddress(18) the Ethernet media-dependent address of the SNMP agent
NTP Subtree
The NTP (1) subtree contains a set of common objects.
ntpStatus(1) the status of NTP service (not server):
1. 1 = Idle
no configuration
2. 2 = Operational
ntpSrvAddr(2) the IP address of NTP server in dot notation format
ntpLnkSrvStatus(3) the status of link between module and NTP server:
1. 1 = NOK (module can not reach NTP server)
2. 2 = OK
ntpReqCnt(4) the number of requests sent to NTP server
ntpRespCnt(5) the number of responses received from NTP server
ntpErrCnt(6) the total number of communication errors
ntpDate(7) date of the day
ntpTime(8) time of the day
ntpTimeZone(9) current time zone
ntpDSTStatus(10) Daylight Savings Time status:
1. 1 = ON (Daylight Savings Time)
2. 2 = OFF (Standard Time)
ntpLastErr(11) Last error code generated by system
260 33002479 10/2019

SNMP
SMTP Subtree
The SMTP (1) subtree contains a set of common objects.
emailIndex(1) the index value in the email service table
smtpStatus(2) the status of SMTP service (not server):
 1 = Idle (no configuration)
 2 = operational
smtpSrvAddr(3) the IP address of SMTP server in dot notation format

smtpMailSentCnt(4) the total number of emails sent to the network and successfully acknowledged by
the server
smtpErrCnt(5) the total number of email messages that could not be sent to the network or that
have been sent but not acknowledged by the server
smtpLastErr(6) the error code of the last error that occurred while trying to send an email message
to the network
smtpLastMailElapsedTime(7) the number of elapsed seconds since last successful email was sent to the server
smtpLnkSrvStatus(8) the status of link with SMTP server:
1. 1 = NOK (not OK), link is down; module failed to contact SMTP server
2. 2 = OK
smtpSrvChkFailCnt(9) the number of times the link to SMTP server is detected as ‘down.’
See the Electronic Mail Notification Service subtree table (see page 282).
NOTE: A diagram of the Schneider Electric private enterprise MIB subtree appears in Simple
Network Management Service (SNMP) (see page 247).
Private Traps and MIB Files

Traps are used to signal status changes to the manager. Using traps helps to avoid adding traffic.
The status changes signaled by the trap are for the:
 LEDs
 communication ports
 I/O scanning health values
 Global Data health
 NTP service
 SMTP service
33002479 10/2019 261

SNMP
The following list describes the characteristics of private traps, which means that they can:
 send messages to the two managers whose IP addresses are configured in the SNMP
configuration (either the PL7 or the Web page)
 use the community name given to this configuration
 enable or disable each of the Transparent Factory Ethernet Private MIB groups: Switch (1),
Port502_Messaging (2), I/O_Scanning (3), Global_Data (4), Web (5), Address_Server (6),
Equipment_Profiles (7), NTP (8), and SMTP (9)
Private traps are described in the MIB ASN.1 description, which is contained in a .mib text file.
NTP Traps
1. DST Change Trap: notifies the manager that the NTP server time has changed either from (a)
standard time to daylight saving time or (b) daylight saving time to standard time
2. NTP Status Change Trap: sent when the NTP component status changes (ntpStatus(1))
3. Leap Second Trap: sent when leap seconds are inserted
SMTP Traps
1. SMTP Status Change Trap: sent when SMTPStatus changes
2. SMTP Link to Server Status Change: sent when tSMTPLnkSrvStatus changes. Trap is sent
when service tries to send an email. Every 30 minutes a periodic test checks the connection to
the SMTP server.
262 33002479 10/2019

Using the NTP Time Service
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 9
NTP Time Synchronization Service
NTP Time Synchronization Service
Introduction
This chapter describes the NTP time synchronization service, which provides an accurate local
clock using NTP.

Topic Page
Introducing the NTP Time Synchronization Service 264
Using the R_NTPC Block for Time Synchronization 267
NTP Time Synchronization Service Operating Conditions 269
Configuring the NTP Time Service 270
33002479 10/2019 263

Introducing the NTP Time Synchronization Service
General
The NTP time service synchronizes computer clocks over the Internet. For example, the time of
one client is synchronized either with another server or to a referenced time source like a radio or
satellite receiver.
Typical time service configurations utilize redundant servers and diverse network paths to achieve
high accuracy and reliability. Time service accuracy can be within a millisecond on LANs and up
to a few tenths of milliseconds on WANs.
Use the time service for:
 event recording (sequence events)
 event synchronization (trigger simultaneous events)
 alarm and I/O synchronization (time stamp alarms)
Features of the NTP Time Service

Some features of the NTP time synchronization service are:
 periodic time correction obtained from the reference-standard time server
 automatic switch over to a backup time server if a problem occurs with the normal time server
system
 controller projects use a function block to read the accurate clock, a feature that allows project
events or variables to be time stamped
 estimated time stamping accuracy of:
 5 mSec for 140 CPU 651 x0’s and higher
 10 mSec for other CPUs
 local time zone is configurable and customizable including daylight savings time
 Web page diagnostics for the time synchronization service
NTP Time Synchronization and Time Stamps

The Schneider Electric Ethernet interface module NOE 771 11 provides the source time-
synchronization signal sent to a controller. The module’s firmware includes an NTP client, which
provides time synchronization.
Action Result
NTP Client requests a time synchronization NTP Server responds with a signal.
signal from an NTP server. (Request is sent
over an Ethernet network.)
NTP Client stores the time.
NTP Client sends a message to the The controller updates its internal clock with
controller’s clock system counter. the following granularity:
 1 ms
264 33002479 10/2019

To read the clock from the PLC application:

 Use the R_NTPC function block (see page 267) in either MAST, FAST, or Interrupt sections.
On an Ethernet network, all controllers should be synchronized with the same NTP server.
NTP Time Synchronization Definitions
Term Description of Service

Local clock offset Accurate local time is maintained by adjusting the time by using a local clock offset. The local
clock offset is calculated by the formula: ( (T4 - T1) + (T3 - T2) ) / 2
The formula’s variables are:
 T1 = Time at which the NTP request is transmitted from the module
 T2 = Time at which the NTP Server receives the request (provided by the module in
response)
 T3 = Time at which the NTP Server transmits the response (provided to the module in the
response)
 T4 = Time at which the NTP Response is received by the module
Time accuracy Local Time error is < 10 ms compared to the reference NTP server:
 Typical: under 5 ms
 Worst case: <10 ms
Note:
1. Settling Time: The maximum accuracy is obtained after 2 updates from the NTP server.
2. Polling Period Dependency: The accuracy is dependent upon the polling period. Less than
10 mSec of error is guaranteed for polling periods of 120 seconds or less. To obtain the best
possible accuracy and if your network bandwidth will allow, reduce the polling period to a
small value.
3. For example, choosing a polling time of 5 seconds provides better accuracy than a time of
30 seconds.
Time zone Default format: Universal Time, Coordinated (UTC)
Optional: Configure the service to use a local time zone. For example, GMT+1 for Barcelona or
Paris
Daylight savings Automatic: module adjusts time in spring and fall
time
33002479 10/2019 265

Term Description of Service

Leap Second Automatic: module inserts or deletes a second
Note:
1. To compensate for the deceleration of the earth’s rotation, a leap second is inserted in the
UTC time every 18 months by an INTERNATIONAL EARTH ROTATION SERVICE (IERS).
2. Leap seconds will be inserted automatically as needed. If needed, leap seconds are inserted
at the end of the last minute in June or December, as commanded by the NTP server.
266 33002479 10/2019

Using the R_NTPC Block for Time Synchronization
R_NTPC Representation
The block reads the Ethernet network system time and transfers it into specified parameters. The
additional parameter EN should be configured.
R_NTPC block has a 16-bit status word.
R_NTPC Parameter Description


Display_NTPC DT + INT NTP clock value displayed in:
(OUT1)  year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds using the DT
format
 milliseconds as an INT
Calc_NTPC UDINT+INT NTP clock value displayed in:

(OUT2)  seconds as an UDINT
 fractions of a second as an INT
33002479 10/2019 267


Status INT Low Byte High Byte Description
0 0 un-initialized state
1 0 illegal
0 1 The CPU is out of synchronization
with the NTP server, but the clock
has been updated at least once by an
external server.
1 1 normal operation
The low byte is managed by the controller
 Set = 0
 The clock value is NOT available.
 The date/time is NOT updated within last two minutes.
 Set = 1
 The date/time is updated within the last two minutes.
 The date/time is acceptable.
The high byte is managed by the NOE.

 Set = 0
 The NTP server clock value is not available.
 Set = 1
The updated date/time is received from server and sent to
the module (at least once).
 within two-minute time interval
 acceptable (10 ms or less error)
For a valid time in the CPU, the low and high bytes of the
STATUS parameter must be set to 1.
268 33002479 10/2019

NTP Time Synchronization Service Operating Conditions
Introduction
This material describes special operating conditions related to:
 powering up
 stop or run PLC
 downloading applications
 configuring the time service
Power up
To establish the accurate Ethernet system network time, the system does the following at power-
up:
 requires the Ethernet module to boot
 uses the Ethernet module to obtain the time from the NTP server
 requires a predefined interval until time is accurate; user’s configuration determines how long
before time is accurate
 may require several updates to achieve peak accuracy
Once an accurate time is received, the service sets the STATUS in the associated time service
register.
The time-service clock value starts at 0 until fully updated from the module.
Model Starting Date

Modicon Quantum with Control Expert January 1st 1980 00:00:00.00
Stop or Run PLC

 Stop and Run have no effect on the accuracy of the clock.
 Stop and Run have no effect on the update of the clock.
 A transition from one mode to the other has no effect on the accuracy of the system Ethernet
network time.
Download Application
The status clock value associated with the time service register in the CPU is reinitialized after an
application is downloaded or after an NTP server swap.
There will be two polling periods before the time is accurate.
NTP Configuration
Elsewhere in this section is information about the NTP configuration.
33002479 10/2019 269

Configuring the NTP Time Service
Configuring the NTP Time Service

In Control Expert, click the NTP tab to configure the following parameters.
270 33002479 10/2019

Field Parameter Action

NTP Server Configuration
IP address of primary NTP server Enter a valid IP address
IP address of secondary NTP server Enter a valid IP address
Polling period (in seconds Enter a value
 min = 1 sec
 max = 120 sec
 default = 5 sec
Time Zone Select from the drop-down menu:

 Universal Time, Coordinated (GMT) = default
 Custom time zone
Automatically adjust clock for daylight This parameter is selected by default (check mark
saving change appears) if daylight saving time is chosen.
Changing Time Service Parameters

To make any changes to the time synchronization service:
Step Action
1 Enter changes in the appropriate field on the NTP configuration page for one or all of the
configurable parameters.
2 Click Save.
Important Information about the Time Service

NOTE: Regarding the time service:
1. Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings change parameter: If this check box is selected,
the module automatically corrects the local time to account for daylight saving time. Therefore,
no action is required, since the daylight saving time start and end are automatically changed
each year.
2. Polling Time Parameter: The time (in seconds) is the time between time updates from the NTP
server. The default is 5 seconds.
3. Storing the Time Service Configuration: The last time service configuration is saved internally
in the Ethernet module.
4. Replacing the Ethernet Module: If the Ethernet module has to be replaced, the stored
configuration is lost, and the system returns to the default configuration.
33002479 10/2019 271

Customizing Time Zone Parameters

If you want a time zone not listed in the time zone table:
Step Action Comment

1 Write the text rules for the custom time zone.
2 Using an FTP client, store your rules in the file: Root directory to store 'customrules' is set by the FTP
/FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP/customrules server as:
user ID: ntpupdate /FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP
password: ntpupdate
3 When the rules are written, choose the drop down The NTP component looks for customrules, calls the
menu on the NTP Configuration web page, and tz compiler and generates a new file called
configure (or reboot) the module by selecting 'tz_custom'. This file is binary file and should not be
Time Zone = Custom edited.
If the tz compiler detects a syntax error in
customrules, the error is logged in the file:
/FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP/error.log
1. NTP component is not launched
2. NTP Status field in diagnostic web page displays
NOT OK.
4 If you want more information, the syntax to write those rules along with a few examples are found in the
module in:
/FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP/instructions.txt
Time Zone Parameters

Select a time zone from the drop-down menu:
Time Zone Description DST

Available
Custom Yes
(GMT-12:00) Dateline Standard Time [Eniwetok Kwajalein] No
(GMT-11:00) Samoa Standard Time [Midway Is Samoa] No
(GMT-10:00) Hawaiian Standard Time [Hawaii Honolulu] No
(GMT-09:00) Alaskan Standard Time [Anchorage] Yes
(GMT-08:00) Pacific Standard Time [Los Angeles Tijuana] Yes
(GMT-07:00) Mexican Standard Time [Chihuahua La Paz Mazatlan] Yes
(GMT-07:00) Mountain Standard Time [Arizona Phoenix] No
(GMT-07:00) Mountain Standard Time [Denver] Yes
(GMT-06:00) Central Standard Time [Chicago] Yes
(GMT-06:00) Mexico Standard Time [Tegucigalpa] No
(GMT-06:00) Canada Central Standard Time [Saskatchewan Regina] No
(GMT-06:00) Central America Standard Time [Mexico_city] Yes
272 33002479 10/2019


Available
(GMT-05:00) SA Pacific Standard Time [Bogota Lima Quito] No
(GMT-05:00) Eastern Standard Time [New York] Yes
(GMT-05:00) Eastern Standard Time [Indiana (East)] [Indianapolis] No
(GMT-04:00) SA Western Standard Time [Caracas La Paz] No
(GMT-04:00) Pacific SA Standard Time [Santiago] Yes
(GMT-03:30) Newfoundland Standard Time [Newfoundland St Johns] Yes
(GMT-03:00) E. South America Standard Time [Brasilia Sao_Paulo] Yes
(GMT-03:00) SA Eastern Standard Time [Buenos Aires Georgetown] No
(GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic Standard Time [South_Georgia] No
(GMT-01:00) Azores Standard Time [Azores Cape Verde Island] Yes
(GMT) Universal Coordinated Time [Casablanca, Monrovia] No
(GMT0) Greenwich Mean Time [Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London] Yes
(GMT+01:00) Romance Standard Time [Amsterdam CopenHagen Madrid Paris Vilnius] Yes
(GMT+01:00) Central European Standard Time [Belgrade Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Zagreb] Yes
(GMT+01:00) Central Europe Standard Time [Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Warsaw] Yes
(GMT+01:00) W. Europe Standard Time [Brussels Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna] Yes
(GMT+02:00) GTB Standard Time [Athens Istanbul Minsk] Yes
(GMT+02:00) E. Europe Standard Time [Bucharest] Yes
(GMT+02:00) Egypt Standard Time [Cairo] Yes
(GMT+02:00) South Africa Standard Time [Johannesburg Harare Pretoria] No
(GMT+02:00) FLE Standard Time [Helsinki Riga Tallinn] Yes
(GMT+02:00) Israel Standard Time [Israel Jerusalem] Yes
(GMT+03:00) Arabic Standard Time [Baghdad] Yes
(GMT+03:00) Arab Standard Time [Kuwait Riyadh] No
(GMT+03:00) Russian Standard Time [Moscow St. Petersburg Volgograd] Yes
(GMT+03:00) E. Africa Standard Time [Nairobi] No
(GMT+03:30) Iran Standard Time [Tehran] Yes
(GMT+04:00) Arabian Standard Time [Abu Dhabi Muscat] No
(GMT+04:00) Caucasus Standard Time [Baku Tbilisi] Yes
(GMT+04:00) Afghanistan Standard Time [Kabul] No
(GMT+05:00) Ekaterinburg Standard Time [Ekaterinburg] Yes
(GMT+05:00) West Asia Standard Time [Islamabad Karachi Tashkent] No
(GMT+05:30) India Standard Time [Bombay Calcutta Madras New Delhi] No
(GMT+06:00) Central Asia Standard Time [Almaty Dhaka] Yes
33002479 10/2019 273


Available
(GMT+06:00) Sri Lanka Standard Time [Columbo] No
(GMT+07:00) SE Asia Standard Time [Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta] No
(GMT+08:00) China Standard Time [Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumqi] No
(GMT+08:00) W. Australia Standard Time [Perth] No
(GMT+08:00) Singapore Standard Time [Singapore] No
(GMT+08:00) Taipei Standard Time [Taipei] No
(GMT+09:00) Tokyo Standard Time [Osako Sapporo Tokyo] No
(GMT+09:00) Korea Standard Time [Seoul] No
(GMT+09:00) Yakutsk Standard Time [Yakutsk] Yes
(GMT+09:30) Cen. Australia Standard Time [Adelaide] Yes
(GMT+09:30) AUS Central Standard Time [Darwin] No
(GMT+10:00) E. Australia Standard Time [Brisbane] No
(GMT+10:00) AUS Eastern Standard Time [Canberra Melbourne Sydney] Yes
(GMT+10:00) West Pacific Standard Time [Guam Port Moresby] No
(GMT+10:00) Tasmania Standard Time [Hobart] Yes
(GMT+10:00) Vladivostok Standard Time [Vladivostok] Yes
(GMT+11:00) Central Pacific Standard Time [Magadan Solomon Is New Caledonia] Yes
(GMT+12:00) New Zealand Standard Time [Auckland Wellington] Yes
(GMT+12:00) Fiji Standard Time [Fiji Kamchatka Marshall Is] No
274 33002479 10/2019

Using the Mail Service
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 10
Electronic Mail Notification Service
Electronic Mail Notification Service
Introduction
This chapter describes the electronic mail notification service, which uses SMTP to allow the
controller’s project to send e-mail messages.

Topic Page
Introducing the Electronic Mail Notification Service 276
Mail Service 278
Using the MBP_MSTR Block for Mail Service Communication 279
Mail Service Error Codes 281
Electronic Mail Notification Service Subtree 282
33002479 10/2019 275

Introducing the Electronic Mail Notification Service
General
The automation controller monitors the system and can automatically create an electronic mail
message alert with data, alarms, and/or events. Mail recipients can be either local or remote.
 Based on predefined events or conditions, messages are created using the MSTR function
block.
 The email message is constructed from predefined headers plus variables and text (a maximum
of 238 bytes). This message is sent directly from the automation system to the local email
server.
 Mail headers contain common predefined items—recipient list, sender name, and subject.
These items can be updated by an authorized administrator.
Mail System Types

The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) provides two mechanisms for the transmission of email
messages:
 direct connection
 relay system
Mechanism Condition Result

Direct connection Sender and receiver are Email messages are sent to host.
connected to the same transport
service.
Relay system Sender and receiver are NOT Email messages are relayed from
connected to the same transport one server to another server.
service. To relay messages, the SMTP
server must be supplied with the
address of the:
 destination host
 destination mailbox
276 33002479 10/2019

Mail Service Client

The Quantum Ethernet module includes an SMTP client. When the module receives a specific
request from the project, it sends an email message to the mail server.
Operating Modes and Sending Requests

Because the project sends the email request, a controller cannot send an email message either
while in the stopped mode or while downloading a project. As soon as the controller is in RUN
mode, the function block sends a request during the first project scan.
Diagnostic counters are reset to 0 after either a power-up, a project download, or a reconfiguration
of the mail service.
33002479 10/2019 277

Mail Service
Configuring the Mail Service

As an authorized administrator, use the SMTP Configuration Web page to:
 configure the service
 set the IP address of the mail server
Elsewhere in this guide is detailed information about configuring the electronic mail service
(see page 310).
NOTE: Default TCP Port: The default TCP port number for SMTP is 25. Ensure that you configure
the port specified by your local mail server.
Message Creation and Delivery

A user-defined event or condition triggers the MSTR block to create a message. Each message
uses one of three user-defined headers. Each message sent from the controller can contain text
and variable information (with a maximum of 238 bytes).
The project selects the appropriate header. Each header contains:
 sender name
 list of recipients
 subject
Header Examples
The text and variable information can be defined and updated by an authorized administrator using
an embedded Web page (SMTP Configuration page). Define mail headers to indicate different
levels of importance. For example:
 Header 1 could be "Urgent problem reported by PLC 10"
 Header 2 could be "NOTIFICATION from substation 10"
 Header 3 could be "INFO message from water system"
Listing different recipients in each of the three headers ensures that the right information quickly
flows to the right recipients. The project adds pertinent information such as the specific device,
process, or location. This pertinent information is added to the body of the mail message. Then the
complete message is sent to an electronic mail server for distribution to recipients. These
recipients could be engineers, managers, or process owners.
Security (Authentication)
An optional login (system ID) and password can be used to authenticate the connection to the
SMTP mail server. The SMTP-supported authentication method is LOGIN.
System Diagnostics
The SMTP Diagnostic Web page displays the status of the service. Diagnostic information is also
available for remote management using the SNMP network management standard.
278 33002479 10/2019

Using the MBP_MSTR Block for Mail Service Communication
Block Representation
Each operation is designated by a code. To send an email message, use the MBP_MSTR block
with function code 13 (see page 171).
The following table describes the MBP_MSTR parameters:

ENABLE None ON = enables selected MBP_MSTR operation
ABORT None ON = terminates active MBP_MSTR operation
ACTIVE None ON while the instruction is active
ERROR None ON if the MBP_MSTR operation is terminated prior to completion
SUCCESS None ON = operation successful
CONTROL INT, UINT Control block is the first of several network-dependant, contiguous, holding words, and
the first of nine contiguous words entered in the top node.
The remaining eight words are:
Displayed: Identifies one of the MBP_MSTR = 13
First implied displays error status (see Mail Service Error Codes
(see page 281))
Second implied displays length (number of words transferred)
Third implied (not used)
Fourth implied high byte: slot address of the NOE module or 0xFE for the
140 CPU 651 x0
low byte: 0 (not used)
Fifth implied (not used)
Sixth implied (not used)
Seventh implied (not used)
Eighth implied (not used)
33002479 10/2019 279


DATABUF INT, UINT The DATABUF parameter is the address of the buffer including the data inserted into
the body of the email message. The data should be in ASCII format starting at the
second word.
Note:
1. Least significant byte of the first word: contains a valid (configured) mail header
(should be of value 1, 2, or 3).
2. Most significant byte of the first word: contains the length of the dynamic part of the
message’s subject field. The length must be between 0 and 238 characters.
DATABUF Parameter Description

The first word of the DATABUF parameter contains the following information:
Byte Number Description Value

1 (least significant byte) Mail header {1, 2, 3}
2 (most significant byte) Nb n of extra characters in User-defined (between 0 and
subject 238)
The second and subsequent words (maximum 119) contain the data (ASCII format) that will be
copied into the email message. The first n characters will be added to the configured email subject.
The remaining characters (2*N-2-n) will be part of the message body. N represents the number of
words transferred.
280 33002479 10/2019

Mail Service Error Codes
Error Codes
The electronic mail notification service supports the following error codes:
Hex. Error Code Description

5100 Internal error.
5101 SMTP component not operational.
5102 Mail header not configured.
5103 Invalid mail header value (should be 1, 2, or 3).
5104 Cannot connect to SMTP server.
5105 Error in transmitting content of email body to SMTP server.
5106 Closing SMTP connection with the server returned an error.
5107 SMTP HELO request failed.
5108 SMTP mail request failed. SMTP server may require authentication.
5109 SMTP RCPT request failed.
510A No recipient has been accepted by the SMTP server.
510B SMTP data request failed.
510C Send email request contains an invalid length.
510D Authentication failed.
510E A reset component request has been received while the connection was
open.
33002479 10/2019 281

Electronic Mail Notification Service Subtree
Summary
The electronic mail delivery service subtree contains the following objects:
Service Description
emaillndex (1) index value in the email service table
smtpStatus (2) global status of the SMTP service:
 idle(1): no configuration
 operational(2): operational and running
 stopped(3): stopped
smtpSrvAddr (3) IP address of the remote SMTP server

smtpMailSentCnt (4) total number of emails sent to the network and successfully
acknowledged by server
smtpErrCnt (5) total number of emails:
 not sent to the network
 sent but not successfully acknowledged by server
(The smtpLastErr (6) object details the errors.)

smtpLastErr (6) last error code (see details at Configuring an NOE with TFE
Private MIB)
smtpLastMailElapsedTime (7) number of seconds elapsed since last successful email
sent
smtpLnkSrvStatus (8) status of link between communication module and remote
SMTP server:
 NOK (1) = SMTP server can NOT be reached
 OK (2) = SMTP server can be reached
smtpSrvChkFailCnt (9) number of times link to SMTP server has been detected as
down
282 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 11
Embedded Web Pages
Embedded Web Pages
Introduction
This chapter presents the contents of the embedded Web pages contained in the Quantum 140
NOE 771 xx modules. These Web pages enable you to access diagnostic information, view
configuration information, and change the online configurations for the module.

Topic Page
Quantum Home Page 284
Monitoring Home Page 285
Diagnostics Home Page 287
Setup Home Page 288
Accessing the Web Utility Home Page 290
Configured Local Rack Page 291
Controller Status Page 292
CPU Configuration Screen: Data Field Descriptions 293
Remote I/O Status 294
Quantum PLC Data Monitor Page 295
SNMP Configuration 296
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Utility Configuration 299
Configure Address Server Page 302
Configuring the Time Synchronization Service 305
Mail Service Configuration 310
Ethernet Module Diagnostic Pages 312
NTP Diagnostics Page 320
Properties Page 322
Contacting Schneider Electric Page 323
33002479 10/2019 283

Embedded Web Pages
Quantum Home Page
Home Page
To access the Quantum home page enter the IP address of the module in his web browser. No
password is required to display the home page:
Links
From the Quantum home page, you can access the following pages:
 Monitoring (see page 285)
 Diagnostics (see page 287)
 Setup (see page 288)
 Documentation
Enter a user name and a password to access the services on these pages.
Language
In the Quantum home page, you can display the Quantum web pages in either English or Chinese.
284 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Monitoring Home Page
Home Page
This page lists the various viewer services supported by the default Web site of the module and
provides links for accessing the services you require.
Illustration
The Monitoring home page looks like this:
To access a service, click on a link. The services include:

 Data editor (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual): for creating variable data tables to
determine their values when the table is animated.
 Data editor lite (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual): for creating variable data
tables to determine their values when the table is animated. (This editor contains fewer features
than the standard Data editor.)
 Graphic editor (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual): for creating graphics to
determine the values of variables when the graphic is animated.
 Graphic viewer (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual): for viewing graphics to
determine the values of variables when the graphic is animated.
33002479 10/2019 285

Embedded Web Pages
 PLC Program viewer (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual): Display Control Expert
programs in run mode using a web browser.
 Password-protected custom pages (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual): for
restricting access to web pages created by the user.
 Custom pages without password protection (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual):
for unrestricted access to web pages created by the user.
 Silverlight pages (see Modicon M340, FactoryCast, User Manual): for viewing user-defined
pages created with Microsoft Expression Blend® software that have been added to the web site
286 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Diagnostics Home Page
Home Page
This page lists the various services supported by the default Web site of the module and provides
links for accessing the services you require.
Illustration
The Diagnostics home page looks like this:
Links
To access the service you require, click on a link:
 Rack Viewer
 Controller Status (see page 292)
 RIO Status (see page 294)
 Alarm Viewer
 Ethernet (see page 312)
 Properties (see page 322)
33002479 10/2019 287

Embedded Web Pages
Setup Home Page
Home Page
The NOE 771 11 Setup page lists the various services used to configure the module. You can
navigate to this page from the link on the Home Page (see page 284).
Illustration
The Setup page looks like this:
288 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Setup Page Links

These links are on the Setup page:
Link Result
SNMP Provides the ability to configure the SNMP Agent in the NOE
Address Server Configure the IP assignments, including showing the BOOTP and DHCP
(see page 302) database
Global Data Displays the Global Data Configuration page. Configure the Group Address,
(see page 195) Multicast filtering, Distribution period, Health Time Out, Health Bits, and Data
Zones. The Global Data Configuration page also displays a Variable Table.
NTP (see page 305) Configure the IP address of the primary and secondary NTP server. Set a
polling period. Select a time zone from the drop-down list, and automatic
adjustment for daylight savings time.
Email (see page 85) Configure the email server’s IP and Port (default port is 25). If security is
required, select Enable and set a Login and Password. Create three mail
headers.
Security View and edit:
 the username and password for accessing the home page
 the password for writing variables to the data editor
FTP View and edit the username and password for the FTP service.
33002479 10/2019 289

Embedded Web Pages
Accessing the Web Utility Home Page
Introduction
Each Modicon Quantum 10-/100-Megabit Ethernet module contains an embedded Web server that
allows you to access diagnostics and online configurations for the module and its associated
controller (PLC).
Pages on the embedded Web site display the following information:
 Configurable menus of the Address Server both BOOTP and DHCP and for SNMP
(see page 302)
 Ethernet statistics for the node (see page 283)
 Controller’s configuration (Controller Status on menu) (see page 292)
 Controller’s register values
 Remote I/O status and configuration (see page 294)
 Remote I/O register values
 Remote I/O distributed values
The FactoryCast/Real Time modules (see page 90) offer these additional pages:
 Configuration and status for Global Data (publish/subscribe) (see page 299)
 Bandwidth monitoring (see page 86)
 I/O Scanner status (see page 314)
 MODBUS Messaging status (see page 79)
 NTP configuration and status (see page 317)
 SMTP configuration and status (see page 318)
The web pages can be viewed using Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher. Either browser supports JRE
1.4.2_04 or higher.
For information about the additional functionality provided by the FactoryCast system in the
Ethernet modules, see the FactoryCast Manual (31001229).
Accessing the Module’s Home Page

Do the following.
Step Action
1 Obtain the full IP address or URL from your system administrator.
2 Type the address or URL in the address or location box in the browser window. The
Schneider Electric Web Utility home page displays.
3 On the Quantum home page (see page 284), click Diagnostics.
4 You will be requested to supply a user name and password.
5 After supplying the user name, password, and clicking OK, the Quantum Welcome
Page appears. The Quantum Welcome Page provides the links to all the Quantum
configuration and diagnostic pages and to the Data Editor / Data Monitor.
NOTE: The default User Name is USER, and the default password is USER. Both
should be changed by the system administrator during module installation.
290 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Configured Local Rack Page
Overview
The Configured Local Rack page shows the current configuration:
Configured Local Rack Page Overview

The following table details the links on the Configured Local Rack page. To view the pages related
to each of these topics, click the topic.
Link Display
Global Data (see page 313) general diagnostics of the global data and a table of all
published/subscribed variables in a distribution group
I/O Scanning (see page 314) general diagnostics of the I/O scanning utility and a summary of the
status of all modules
Messaging (see page 315) current information on open TCP connections on Port502
Bandwidth Monitoring load distribution of the Embedded Server module between the global
(see page 316) data utilities, I/O scanning, messaging, and other utilities
Statistics (see page 316) Ethernet module statistics with the reset counters link
NTP (see page 317) time synchronization service parameters
Email (see page 318) Email notification service parameters
Upload MIB file upload the private MIB source file
Crash Log file (see page 319) crash message (after crash) and status message (normal
operations)
33002479 10/2019 291

Embedded Web Pages
Controller Status Page
Overview
The Controller Status Page provides up-to-date information about the controller and its
configuration. Access this page by selecting the CPU model from the Rack Viewer (see page 291)
or the hyperlink Controller Status.
Sample Page
Here is an example of a Controller Status page.
Dynamic Data
Some of the data provided on this page is dynamic. Dynamic data is constantly refreshed at a rate
determined by the performance of the Embedded Server, network, and client CPU.
292 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
CPU Configuration Screen: Data Field Descriptions
Description Fields
The following table describes the description fields on the CPU Configuration Screen
(see page 292):
Field Description
System Memory [Kb] Amount of system memory used
Extended Memory [Kb] Amount of extended memory used
Total Memory [Bytes] Total memory used in bytes
I/O Map Words Number of I/O words mapped.
Segments Number of segments
DCP Drop ID Drop number for distributed control
Memory Protect Position of the memory protect switch
Constant Sweep Current status of constant sweep
Optimize Current status of optimization
Word Fields
The following table describes the Word fields on the CPU Configuration Screen (see page 292):
Field Description
%M valid address of %M
%I valid address of %I
%IW valid address of %IW
%MW valid address of %MW
Battery Coil address of battery bit
Timer Register address of timer word
Time of Day Clock address of timer of day clock
Stopped Codes reason for controlled stopping
ASCII Fields
The ASCII column on the CPU Configuration Screen (see page 292) contains information about
the ASCII fields.
33002479 10/2019 293

Embedded Web Pages
Remote I/O Status
Overview
The Remote I/O Status page gives an overview of the status and health of the Remote I/O network
communications. Access this page by selecting the CRP Drop down menu item Remote I/O Status
or using the hyperlink RIO Status.
Sample Page
Here is an example of a Remote I/O Status page.
Dynamic Data
Some of the data provided on this page is dynamic. Dynamic data is constantly refreshed at a rate
determined by the performance of the embedded server, network, and client CPU.
294 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Quantum PLC Data Monitor Page
Introduction to the PLC Data Monitor Page

The following figure shows the Web page that allows you to display Quantum PLC data.
You can add, delete, and copy Quantum PLC data as described in the following list:
 Insert additional rows of data by clicking on the Insert Rows button.
 Delete specific rows of data by clicking on the Cut Rows button.
 Copy in rows of data by clicking on the Paste Rows button.
33002479 10/2019 295

Embedded Web Pages
SNMP Configuration
Overview
This topic describes SNMP configuration for the Quantum Ethernet module through the SNMP
Configuration page.
SNMP Configuration Page

Click the SNMP link in the Setup home page to display the Configure SNMP page:
The following table describes the SNMP configuration tasks that you can perform through the Web
page:
Task How To
To display the current SNMP configuration Click Show SNMP Configuration.
To clear the fields Click Reset the Form.
To change the SNMP configuration Change the information on the page and click
Update SNMP.
296 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
SNMP Page Fields

The following table describes the SNMP fields that you can modify.
Field Information To Be Supplied

Manager I IP Address of first SNMP Manager
Manager II IP Address of second SNMP Manager
Location [SysLocation] Location of the module
Contact [SysContact] Name of the responsible systems engineer
Set Designation of user level who can set the configuration
Get Designation of user level who can view the configuration
Trap Designation of user level who can capture information
Authentication Failure Trap Turns on Community Name Checking
Enabled
After you make your modifications to any of the above parameters, click Update SNMP. A new
page displays the following message: "Successfully updated SNMP database." Note that this page
contains the same links as those on the Configure SNMP page.
NOTE: Reset the module to implement the changes.
SNMP Community Strings

Use strings to restrict access to the SNMP Agent. These strings should be set to non-trivial names
during module installation.
33002479 10/2019 297

Embedded Web Pages
Modifying the SNMP Community Strings

To configure the SNMP community strings:
Step Action
1 Enter the following URL into your browser:
http://hostname/secure/embedded/builtin?submit=Configure+SNMP
or click the SNMP link in the Setup home page to navigate to the SNMP Configuration
page.
2 Enter the Community names for Set, Get, and Trap into the SNMP Configuration page
as shown below.
3 Click Update SNMP.

4 To set your changes, use hot swap to reboot the module.
298 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Utility Configuration
Overview
Whether you use either the Configure Each Device Separately or the Copy Configuration method
(see page 195), the procedure to configure individual parameters is the same. Therefore, in order
to use the Global Data (publish/subscribe) utility in the NOE, you need to configure the Global Data
parameters including:
 Distribution period
 Multicast filtering
 Health bit location
 Global Data base address
 Group IP address
The following sections describe in detail the exact steps to configure each parameter on the Global
Data Configuration page.
Illustration
You can change the configuration in the Global Data Configuration page:
33002479 10/2019 299

Embedded Web Pages
Configuring Global Data

After you have completed the Modeling System Configuration process (see page 195) using the
second method, Copy Configuration, you modify the following parameters:
 Distribution period
 Health Time Out
 Health Bits location
 Start address
 Type: Pub / Sub / None
Please do not change Symbol (description), and Length.

To change the Global Data variables of the group box on the Global Data Configuration page,
follow the instructions below.
Step Action
1 Adjust the Distribution Period cycle. Enter a value from 1 through 50.
Note: Distribution Period is the minimum number of controller scan times before an
update occurs.
2 Before entering a value in the Group Address field, identify the station’s distribution
group. The Group Address entry will be an IP address from 224.0.0.0 through
239.255.255.255.
Group Address: the Class D Multicast IP address used for a distribution group.
Members of this distribution group are configured to use the same group address;
therefore, members can communicate with each other using Global Data.
3 Set the timeout in the Health Time Out field. This value is measured in milliseconds
and can be set to a value that ranges from 50 through 15000 ms (in 50 ms
increments)
Note: Health Time Out is the maximum time between received subscriptions before
a subscription is declared unhealthy (inoperable).
4 In the 4x starting address, set the Data Zone field.
5 If you are connected to an Ethernet switch that supports multicast filtering, click the
Multicast filtering check box.
6 Enter %MW word (4x register) location for the Health Bits. This is the location for
storing health bits.
NOTE: Health bits run in different directions.

 I/O scanner health bits run left to right.
 Global Data health bits run right to left.
300 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Changing Global Data Variables

To change the Global Data variables that appear in the Variable Table area, follow the instructions
below.
Step Action
1 Highlight the identification number in the Data ID column.
2 In the Type column select the publish/subscribe variable type from the drop down
list. Three options are available publish, subscribe, or none, displayed as:
 NONE
 SUB
 PUB
3 In the Symbol column you may enter text to describe the variable.
4 In the Address column you see the application address for this variable.
Note: This is a read only field.
5 In the Length column for each row, type a value, which represents the number of
4x registers. The ending 4x register field is automatically updated. If you are using
the second method, Copy Configuration, update Length the first time only.
6 When you are finished, click the Update Global Data Configuration button.
Verifying System Operation

To verify that the system is operational, do the following:
Step Action
1 Verify that every controller is running.
2 Look at the health of variables using the Global Data Diagnostics page.
Follow these links: Diagnostics → Ethernet → Global Data
33002479 10/2019 301

Embedded Web Pages
Configure Address Server Page
Overview
This topic describes the DHCP and BOOTP address server configuration for the Transparent
Factory Ethernet modules.
NOTE: To configure the address server for the 140 NOE 771 x FactoryCast Web server modules,
see Address Server Configuration/Fast Device Replacement (see page 238), which describes the
BOOTP process.
Address Server Page

The Address Server Configuration page appears below:
302 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Adding Entries
Create new address server configurations with these steps:
Step Action
1 Press Add a New Entry. A dialog appears in the web frame:
Note: The system does not allow you to enter text in both the Role Name and Device
MAC Address text fields. Create either a DHCP configuration (Role Name) or a
BOOTP (Device MAC Address) configuration.
2 For the address server configuration type (DHCP or BOOTP), enter text in the
appropriate field:
 Role Name: variable name for DHCP address server configuration
 Device MAC Address: MAC address for BOOTP address server configuration
3 Enter an address in the Device IP Address field. (We have provided an example
address.)
4 Enter an address in the Subnet Mask field. (We have provided an example address.)
5 Enter an address in the Gateway field. (We have provided an example address.)
6 Press the Add the Entry button.
33002479 10/2019 303

Embedded Web Pages
When you press the Add the Entry button, a new entry that corresponds to your input appears in
the table in the web frame:
When you use the same Add the Entry procedure to add subsequent entries, multiple entries
appear in the table:
In the above figure, a user has highlighted the radio button for test_1. That item can now be edited
with the last row of buttons:
Button Function
Change an Entry Change the table data for the entry.
Delete an Entry Delete the entry from the table data for the entry.
Note: The selected radio button has no effect on the Add a New Entry function.
Note: You can press the Refresh Address Server Database Table button to refresh the table
data at any time.
304 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Configuring the Time Synchronization Service
Configuring the Time Service

You can configure the time service using either the module’s NTP Configuration page in Control
Expert or the embedded Web page.
Time Service Command Buttons

Execute the following commands:
Button Description
Save Stores new NTP (time service) configuration. Previous configuration is no longer valid.
Cancel Cancels new NTP (time service) configuration. Previous configuration is valid.
Disable NTP IP of Primary and Standby set = 0.
NTP server not polled.
Time in controller not updated.
33002479 10/2019 305

Embedded Web Pages
Configurable Time Service Parameters

Configure or change the following parameters on the NTP Configuration page.
1. IP address of primary NTP server
 Enter a valid IP address
2. IP address of secondary NTP server

 Enter a valid IP address
3. Polling Period (in seconds)

Enter a value
 min = 1sec
 max = 120sec
 default = 5 sec
4. Time Zone
 Select from drop-down menu
Universal Time, Coordinated (GMT) = default
 Custom time zone
5. Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving change

 Parameter is selected by default (check mark appears) if daylight saving time is chosen.
Changing Time Service Parameters

To make any changes to the time synchronization service:
Step Action
1 Enter changes in the appropriate field on the NTP Configuration page for one or
all of the configurable parameters.
2 Click Save.
Important Information about the Time Service

NOTE: About the time service:
1. Enable/Disable Daylight Savings Time parameter: If the Enable/Disable check box is selected,
the module automatically corrects the local time to account for daylight savings time. Therefore,
no action is required, since the daylight saving time start and end are automatically changed
each year.
2. Polling Time Parameter: The time (in seconds) is the time between time updates from the NTP
server. The default is 5 seconds.
3. Storing the Time Service Configuration: The last time service configuration is saved internally
in the Ethernet module.
4. Replacing the Ethernet Module: If the Ethernet module has to be replaced, the stored
configuration is lost, and the system returns to the default configuration.
306 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Customizing Time Zone Parameters

If you want a time zone not listed in the time zone table:
Step Action Comment

1 Write the text rules for the custom time zone.
2 Using an FTP client, store your rules in the file: Root directory to store 'customrules' is set by the FTP
/FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP/customrules server as:
user ID: ntpupdate /FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP
password: ntpupdate
3 When the rules are written, choose the drop down The NTP component looks for customrules, calls the
menu on the NTP Configuration web page, and tz compiler and generates a new file called
configure (or reboot) the module by selecting 'tz_custom'. This file is binary file and should not be
Time Zone = Custom edited.
If the tz compiler detects a syntax error in
customrules, the error is logged in the file:
/FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP/error.log
1. NTP component is not launched
2. NTP Status field in diagnostic web page displays
NOT OK.
4 If you want more information, the syntax to write those rules along with a few examples are found in the
module in:
/FLASH0/wwwroot/conf/NTP/instructions.txt
Time Zone Parameters

Select a time zone from the drop-down menu.
Time Zone Description DST Available

Custom Yes
(GMT-12:00) Dateline Standard Time [Eniwetok Kwajalein] No
(GMT-11:00) Samoa Standard Time [Midway Is Samoa] No
(GMT-10:00) Hawaiian Standard Time [Hawaii Honolulu] No
(GMT-09:00) Alaskan Standard Time [Anchorage] Yes
(GMT-08:00) Pacific Standard Time [Los Angeles Tijuana] Yes
(GMT-07:00) Mexican Standard Time [Chihuahua La Paz Mazatlan] Yes
(GMT-07:00) Mountain Standard Time [Arizona Phoenix] No
(GMT-07:00) Mountain Standard Time [Denver] Yes
(GMT-06:00) Central Standard Time [Chicago] Yes
(GMT-06:00) Mexico Standard Time [Tegucigalpa] No
(GMT-06:00) Canada Central Standard Time [Saskatchewan Regina] No
(GMT-06:00) Central America Standard Time [Mexico_city] Yes
(GMT-05:00) SA Pacific Standard Time [Bogota Lima Quito] No
33002479 10/2019 307

Embedded Web Pages

(GMT-05:00) Eastern Standard Time [New York] Yes
(GMT-05:00) Eastern Standard Time [Indiana (East)] [Indianapolis] No
(GMT-04:00) SA Western Standard Time [Caracas La Paz] No
(GMT-04:00) Pacific SA Standard Time [Santiago] Yes
(GMT-03:30) Newfoundland Standard Time [Newfoundland St Johns] Yes
(GMT-03:00) E. South America Standard Time [Brasilia Sao_Paulo] Yes
(GMT-03:00) SA Eastern Standard Time [Buenos Aires Georgetown] No
(GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic Standard Time [South_Georgia] No
(GMT-01:00) Azores Standard Time [Azores Cape Verde Island] Yes
(GMT) Universal Coordinated Time [Casablanca, Monrovia] No
(GMT0) Greenwich Mean Time [Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London] Yes
(GMT+01:00) Romance Standard Time [Amsterdam CopenHagen Madrid Paris Vilnius] Yes
(GMT+01:00) Central European Standard Time [Belgrade Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Zagreb] Yes
(GMT+01:00) Central Europe Standard Time [Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Warsaw] Yes
(GMT+01:00) W. Europe Standard Time [Brussels Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna] Yes
(GMT+02:00) GTB Standard Time [Athens Istanbul Minsk] Yes
(GMT+02:00) E. Europe Standard Time [Bucharest] Yes
(GMT+02:00) Egypt Standard Time [Cairo] Yes
(GMT+02:00) South Africa Standard Time [Johannesburg Harare Pretoria] No
(GMT+02:00) FLE Standard Time [Helsinki Riga Tallinn] Yes
(GMT+02:00) Israel Standard Time [Israel Jerusalem] Yes
(GMT+03:00) Arabic Standard Time [Baghdad] Yes
(GMT+03:00) Arab Standard Time [Kuwait Riyadh] No
(GMT+03:00) Russian Standard Time [Moscow St. Petersburg Volgograd] Yes
(GMT+03:00) E. Africa Standard Time [Nairobi] No
(GMT+03:30) Iran Standard Time [Tehran] Yes
(GMT+04:00) Arabian Standard Time [Abu Dhabi Muscat] No
(GMT+04:00) Caucasus Standard Time [Baku Tbilisi] Yes
(GMT+04:00) Afghanistan Standard Time [Kabul] No
(GMT+05:00) Ekaterinburg Standard Time [Ekaterinburg] Yes
(GMT+05:00) West Asia Standard Time [Islamabad Karachi Tashkent] No
(GMT+05:30) India Standard Time [Bombay Calcutta Madras New Delhi] No
(GMT+06:00) Central Asia Standard Time [Almaty Dhaka] Yes
(GMT+06:00) Sri Lanka Standard Time [Columbo] No
308 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages

(GMT+07:00) SE Asia Standard Time [Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta] No
(GMT+08:00) China Standard Time [Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumqi] No
(GMT+08:00) W. Australia Standard Time [Perth] No
(GMT+08:00) Singapore Standard Time [Singapore] No
(GMT+08:00) Taipei Standard Time [Taipei] No
(GMT+09:00) Tokyo Standard Time [Osako Sapporo Tokyo] No
(GMT+09:00) Korea Standard Time [Seoul] No
(GMT+09:00) Yakutsk Standard Time [Yakutsk] Yes
(GMT+09:30) Cen. Australia Standard Time [Adelaide] Yes
(GMT+09:30) AUS Central Standard Time [Darwin] No
(GMT+10:00) E. Australia Standard Time [Brisbane] No
(GMT+10:00) AUS Eastern Standard Time [Canberra Melbourne Sydney] Yes
(GMT+10:00) West Pacific Standard Time [Guam Port Moresby] No
(GMT+10:00) Tasmania Standard Time [Hobart] Yes
(GMT+10:00) Vladivostok Standard Time [Vladivostok] Yes
(GMT+11:00) Central Pacific Standard Time [Magadan Solomon Is New Caledonia] Yes
(GMT+12:00) New Zealand Standard Time [Auckland Wellington] Yes
(GMT+12:00) Fiji Standard Time [Fiji Kamchatka Marshall Is] No
33002479 10/2019 309

Embedded Web Pages
Mail Service Configuration
Configuring the Mail Service with the Email Configuration Page

Use the module’s embedded Web page to configure the Electronic Mail Notification service. No
other method is available.
Mail Service Command Buttons
Button Description
Save Saves the new Email configuration.
Note: The previous configuration is no longer valid and it is not stored.
Cancel Cancels the entries in the fields.
The previous configuration is valid.
Disable Email Clears the stored configuration, and disables the email service.
Note: The next time the service is enabled, a new configuration is required.
310 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Configurable Mail Service Parameters
IP address of Email Enter a valid IP address. (This parameter identifies the SMTP
server.)
Port Default = 25 (If necessary, you may enter a new value.)
Password Authentication If you want to restrict access, enable Password Authentication
by entering a check mark in the box.
Enter values for:
 Login:
 Any printable character allowed
 64 character maximum
 Password:
 Any printable character allowed
3 mail headers Each header contains:

 sender’s ID in the From: field
 32 character maximum; no spaces
 list of recipients in the To: field

 Separate each email address with a comma.
 fixed part of message in the Subject: field

 (32 character maximum)
The Subject field consists of two parts:

1. Fixed (32 character maximum)
2. Dynamic (206 character maximum)
33002479 10/2019 311

Embedded Web Pages
Ethernet Module Diagnostic Pages
Overview
The Ethernet menu contains a list of links for accessing the different diagnostic pages for the
Ethernet module:
 Global Data
 I/O Scanning (see page 199)
 Messaging
 Bandwidth Monitoring (see page 86)
 Statistics
 NTP (network time protocol)
 Email
 Upload MIB File
 Crash Log File
Click a link to access the desired diagnostics utility.
312 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Global Data Page

Information on the general diagnostics of Global Data can be found at the top of this page:
 Status
 Number of publications per second
 Number of subscriptions per second
This page also shows a table of published and subscribed variables in the same distribution group.
Each variable is identified by its Identifier:
 Green for the subscribed variables
 Black for the published variables
 White for unconfigured variables
 Red for variables with communication interruptions
33002479 10/2019 313

Embedded Web Pages
I/O Scanning Page

General diagnostics for the I/O scanning service are shown at the top of this page:
 the I/O scanning status
 the number of transactions per second
 the number of connections
A value of NOK in the I/O Scanning Status field indicates that the local system is not scanning. In
this case, any data that appears in the Scanned Device Status display is meaningless.
A value of OK in the I/O Scanning Status field indicates that the values in the Scanned Device
Status display are reporting the state of scanned devices.
In the Scanned Device Status display, the colors that appear in each block indicate the following
states for specific remote devices:
 Green indicates that a device is being scanned
 Black indicates that I/O scanning of the specific device has been intentionally disabled via the
 White indicates an unconfigured device
 Red indicates a suspect device
NOTE: Be aware that the green Scanning indicator may incorrectly remain green for a remote
scanned device after the Ethernet cable gets removed from that device. This inaccurate indication
occurs when the health timeout value in the I/O Scanning configuration screen is set to 0
(see page 204).
You should configure an operational health timeout value in the range 1...65535 (in 1 ms
increments). If the health timeout value is set to any value in this range, the Scanning indicator
reports I/O scanning health correctly.
314 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Messaging Page
This page provides current information on the open TCP connections on port 502.
The number of sent/received messages on the port can be found at the top of this page.
A table provides, for each connection (numbered from 1 to 64):
 remote IP Address
 remote TCP port
 local TCP port
 number of messages sent from this connection
 number of messages received from this connection
 detected event number on this connection
NOTE: Following a request to close a connection, the PLC may hold the connection open in its
memory for a few minutes, during which the table will reflect the open connection.
Number of Messages received is not reset after a port 502 connection is closed. Therefore, the
count indicates the total number of messages that have been received since the module was
started.
The remote address ‘127.0.0.1’ is used as Private System Connection For Diagnostic Feature or
SOAP Communications.
33002479 10/2019 315

Embedded Web Pages
Bandwidth Monitoring Page

This page displays the load distribution of the Embedded Server module between the Global Data
utilities, I/O Scanning, Messaging, and other utilities:
Ethernet Statistics Page

The Ethernet Module Statistics page provides information about the status, transmit and receive
statistics, and detected errors for the Embedded Server module. Access this page by selecting the
NOE module from the local rack or use the hyperlink Statistics. The following graphic is an example
Ethernet Module Statistics page:
NOTE: Refer to Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module User Guide (840 USE 107) and
Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module User Guide (840 USE 115) for definitions of terms.
316 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
NTP Diagnostics Page
Time synchronization service parameters:
NTP status Service is correctly configured (OK)
NTP server status NTP client is connected to the NTP server, and if the server is Primary
or Standby
NTP requests Total number of client requests sent to the NTP server
NTP responses Total number of server responses sent from the NTP server
Number of errors Total number of unanswered NTP requests
Last error code Last detected error code received from the NTP client
Date Date in d/m/y format
Time Time
Time zone Time zone plus or minus Universal Time, Coordinated (UTC)
DST Daylight saving time (DST) parameter is either
1. on (enabled)
2. off (disabled)
33002479 10/2019 317

Embedded Web Pages
Last Error field displays values, which indicate the type of detected event.
Type of detected event Value

Component OK and running 0
Excessive network traffic or server overload 1
Bad parameters in the configuration 3
Component is disabled 4
Incorrect IP 9
Time zone file absent 14
Incorrect syntax in the customrules file 15
Email Diagnostics Page
Email status Email service is correctly configured (OK).
Link to Server Status Ethernet module is connected to the SMTP server.
Status is checked at start-up and at least every 30 minutes
after start-up:
 Green = module connected to server
 Red = module NOT connected to server
SMTP Server IP Address IP address of the SMTP server

Number of e-mails sent Total number of e-mails sent successfully
318 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Number of Responses from Total number of SMTP messages received from the SMTP
SMTP Server server
Number of Errors Total number of e-mails not sent because of a detected error
Last Errors Reason for the last detected error with a code in
hexadecimal.
0 indicates no detected error.
Last Mail Header Used Last header used by giving the number.
Number of seconds elapsed Counts the number of seconds since the last email was
since last e-mail successfully successfully sent.
sent
Number of times the link to the Number of times the SMTP server could not be reached.
server has been detected (Link checked every 30 minutes.)
down
Upload MIB File

When you select Upload MIB File, the File Download dialog box appears. You are asked if you
want to save the MIB file or open it:
Crash Log Diagnostics Page

The Crash Diagnostics Page displays a crash log file when an unrecoverable event has occurred,
and a status message otherwise.
Press Clear Crash Log File to clear the log file (see page 349).
33002479 10/2019 319
Embedded Web Pages
NTP Diagnostics Page
NTP Diagnostic Dialog

Time synchronization service parameters are in the table:
NTP status Service is correctly configured (OK)
NTP server status NTP client is connected to the NTP server, and if the server is Primary
or Standby
NTP requests Total number of client requests sent to the NTP server
NTP responses Total number of server responses sent from the NTP server
Number of errors Total number of unanswered NTP requests
Last error code Last error code received from the NTP client
Date Date in d/m/y format
Time Time
Time zone Time zone plus or minus Universal Time, Coordinated (UTC)
DST Daylight saving time (DST) parameter is either
1. on (enabled)
2. off (disabled)
The dialog:
320 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Last Error Field

Last Error field displays values, which indicate the type of error.
Type of Error Value

Component OK and running 0
Excessive network traffic or server overload 1
Bad parameters in the configuration 3
Component is disabled 4
Incorrect IP 9
Time zone file absent 14
Syntax error in the customrules file 15
33002479 10/2019 321

Embedded Web Pages
Properties Page
Introduction to the Properties Page

You can navigate to the Properties page from the Diagnostics page.The Properties page displays
the versions of the Exec, Kernel, Web Server, Web Pages and the Physical Media:
NOTE: This page only reports this information. The fields cannot be changed.
322 33002479 10/2019

Embedded Web Pages
Contacting Schneider Electric Page
Schneider Electric Contact Page

The following figure shows the Contacting Schneider Electric page, which contains information
about how to obtain support for the NOE 771 xx modules.
33002479 10/2019 323

Embedded Web Pages
324 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
33002479 10/2019
Chapter 12
Hot Standby
Hot Standby
Overview
The Quantum Ethernt module offers a Hot Standby configuration available for Quantum
controllers.

Topic Page
Quantum Hot Standby for Control Expert 326
Hot Standby Topology 328
NOE Module Configuration and Hot Standby 329
140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 IP Address Assignment 330
140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 Operating Modes in Quantum Hot Standby System 332
NOE IP Address Swap Times 336
Network Effects of Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Control Expert Solution 337
33002479 10/2019 325

Hot Standby
Quantum Hot Standby for Control Expert
The Hot Standby Solution
CAUTION
RISK OF INCREASE OF TIME TO SWAP
Whenever possible, use of a switch (not a hub) to connect the NOE modules to each other or to
the network.
Schneider Electric offers switches. Contact a local sales office for more information.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Design your application so that unmonitored modules support communication only to noncritical
parts of the application.
In the hot standby solution, two identically configured PLC systems are set up to control the same
application. One PLC, the primary, runs the application and updates the other secondary (standby)
PLC. The standby maintains awareness of the application status but does not perform any control
functions. In the event of a failure in the primary PLC, the standby PLC takes over the primary PLC
responsibilities. When the PLC that has failed becomes operational again, it comes back up in the
hot standby system as the new secondary PLC.
The NOEs coordinate the swapping of IP addresses. After closing both the client and the server
connections, each NOE sends a swap UDP message to its peer NOE. The sending NOE then
waits a specified timeout (500 ms) for the peer swap of UDP messages. Either after receiving the
messages or after a timeout, the NOE changes its IP address.
NOTE: NOEs must communicate with each other in order to swap IP addresses. Schneider Electric
recommends that you connect the primary and secondary NOEs to the same switch because:
 Communication failures between the NOEs increases the time to swap.
 Connecting 2 NOEs to the same switch minimizes the probability of a communication failure.
NOTE: Schneider Electric recommends that you use a switch (not a hub) to connect the NOEs to
each other or to the network. Schneider Electric offers switches; please contact a local sales office
for more information.
326 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
The NOE waits for either a change in the controller’s Hot Standby state or the swap of UDP
messages. Then the NOE performs 1 of 2 Hot Standby actions.
If the NOE . . . Then

Detects that the new Hot Standby state is either The NOE changes the IP address.
primary or standby
Receives a swap UDP message The NOE transmits a Swap UDP message and swaps
the IP address.
All client/server services (I/O scanner, global data, messaging, FTP, SNMP, and HTTP) continue
to run after the switch from the old to the new primary NOE.
NOTE: Failure of an NOE module is not a condition for the primary system to leave the primary
state.
Hot Standby and NOE Module Functionality

The following table identifies the Ethernet services that are available and unavailable in a hot
standby solution.
Service NOE 771 Family

I/O Scanning Available
Global Data Available
Modbus Messaging Available
FTP/TFTP Available
SNMP Available
HTTP Server Available
DHCP Unavailable
NOTE: Only the 140 NOE 771 01 or 140 NOE 771 11 (TCP/IP Ethernet modules) support a
Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity V2.0 system.
33002479 10/2019 327

Hot Standby
Hot Standby Topology
Hot Standby Interconnection

The following diagram shows a Hot Standby system and the relationship between the 2 redundant
systems. Two 140 CPU 67• 6• controllers are connected via a link created with fiber optic cable.
The RIOs are connected both to each other (through the fiber optic cable) and to the RIO drops.
NOTE: The following three items are required.

1. Two identical systems
2. identical order of modules in each rack
3. identical software revisions
The NOEs are connected to the same switch. Connecting to the same switch is recommended
because the NOEs communicate with each other in order to swap the IP address.
There are two reasons to connect to the same switch:
 If a failure to communicate between the NOEs occurs, the time to swap increases.
 To minimize the probability of a failure, connect the two NOEs to the same switch.
The other requirement for the switches is that they are on the same sub-network.
328 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
NOE Module Configuration and Hot Standby
TCP/IP Configuration
When the NOE module goes into service the first time, it attempts to get its IP address from a
BOOTP server. If a BOOTP server is not available, the NOE module derives its IP address from
its MAC address. Connecting to a BOOTP server or deriving the IP address from a MAC address
gives you a connection to the NOE, and you can then download a project to the PLC.
All standard rules apply to IP addressing with the additional restriction that the IP address cannot
be greater than 253 or broadcast address minus 2. Also, no other device can be assigned the
configured IP + 1 address.
33002479 10/2019 329

Hot Standby
140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 IP Address Assignment
Configuring a 140 NOE 771 •1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 Module

Since the primary and standby PLCs in a Quantum Hot Standby system have identical
configurations, the configured 140 NOE 771 •1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module IP addresses are the
same. The current local Hot Standby mode determines the IP address.
This table shows how the 140 NOE 771 •1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module IP addresses are assigned:
Hot Standby State IP Address

primary CPU IP address configured in Control Expert
standby CPU IP address configured in Control Expert + 1
transition from primary to offline IP address configured in Control Expert, if peer controller does
not go to primary
transition from standby to offline IP address configured in Control Expert + 1
IP Address Restrictions
Do not use either the broadcast IP address -1 or broadcast IP address - 2 to configure a
140 NOE 771 •1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module.
For example, do not configure the primary CPU address as nnn.nnn.nnn.254. This causes the
standby CPU IP address to be nnn.nnn.nnn.255. The standby CPU would then return the
diagnostic code Bad IP configuration.
IP Address Transparency
WARNING
For a Quantum Hot Standby configuration:
 Do not use the IP address configured in Control Expert + 1.
 Do not use consecutive IP addresses of the IP address configured in Control Expert.
When a switchover occurs, the new primary PLC takes the IP address of the old primary PLC.
When the PLC that has stopped becomes operational again and rejoins the Hot Standby system,
it takes the IP address of the standby PLC.
The new primary 140 NOE 771 •1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module has the same IP address as the
former primary module. The IP address in the secondary module is IP address + 1.
330 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
The 140 NOE 771 •1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 modules integrated into the Quantum Hot Standby
configuration coordinate this swapping of IP addresses with the management of Ethernet services
used.
140 NOE 771 •1 IP Address Swap Time

The following table details the 140 NOE 771 •1 module IP address swap time:
Service Typical Swap Time Maximum Swap Time

swap IP address 6 ms 500 ms
I/O scanning 1 initial cycle of I/O scanning 500 ms + 1 initial cycle of I/O scanning
140 NOC 78• 00 IP Address Swap Time

The following table details the 140 NOC 78• 00 module IP address swap time:
Maximum swap time 500 ms (IP address swapping) + connection establishment

time (3 s)
Recommended setting for implicit message Set RPI to 1/2 of MAST cycle time (50 ms maximum)
Timeout multiplier setting for EtherNet/IP (EIP) scanner connections:
MAST Cycle Time (ms) Recommended RPI (ms) Timeout Multiplier Connection Timeout
(ms)
20 10 16 160
50 25 8 200
100 50 4 200
200 50 4 200
255 50 4 200
NOTE: The maximum swap time may increase if the end device does not respond in a timely
manner.
NOTE: During the swap, there may be disruption in communication between the 140 NOE 771 •1
/ 140 NOC 78• 00 module and the end device. Confirm that the application can tolerate this
communication disruption.
33002479 10/2019 331

Hot Standby
140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 Operating Modes in Quantum Hot Standby System
Operating Modes
The 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module modes are:
 primary mode:
The Hot Standby mode is primary CPU and client/server services are active.
 standby mode:
The Hot Standby mode is standby CPU and server services are active except DHCP.
 standalone mode:
The 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module is in a non-redundant system, or the CPU is not
present or not healthy.
 offline mode:
The CPU is stopped.
The Quantum Hot Standby and the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 operating modes are
synchronized by these conditions:
CPU Module Status Hot Standby State 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00
Operating Mode
present and healthy primary CPU primary
present and healthy standby CPU standby
present and healthy offline offline
present and healthy unassigned standalone
Not present or unhealthy N/A standalone
Any of the following events affect the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 operating mode:
 a 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module is powered up
 a 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module executes a Hot Standby switchover
 a 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module goes to offline mode
 a new application is downloaded to the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module
332 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
IP Address Assignment at Power-Up

A 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module obtains its IP address assignment at power-up as
follows:
If the Hot Standby state is... Then the IP address assigned is...
unassigned Default IP address
primary CPU IP address configured in Control Expert
standby CPU IP address configured in Control Expert + 1
unassigned to offline transition See the Offline Mode at Power-up Sequence topic in the next table.
If two 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 modules power-up simultaneously, then:
 Their mode (primary or standby) is determined by the mode of CPU in their rack.
 The primary 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 has the IP address configured in Control
Expert.
 The standby 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 has the IP address configured in Control
Expert + 1.
Offline Mode at Power-up Sequence Result

Controller A powers up before
controller B.  IP address of controller A is the IP address configured in
Control Expert.
 IP address of controller B is the IP address configured in
Control Expert + 1.
Both controller A and controller B power The resolution algorithm assigns the configured IP address to
up at the same time. controller A, and it assigns the configured IP address + 1 to
controller B.
The 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module detects a duplicate IP address, the IP address
remains at the default IP and the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module blinks a diagnostic
code.
If no IP configuration exists, 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 modules remains in the
standalone mode. The IP address must be obtained for the:
 140 NOE 771 x1 via a BOOTP server
 140 NOC 78• 00 based on the MAC address
33002479 10/2019 333

Hot Standby
Ethernet Services at Power Up

The following table shows how the status of a 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module’s service
is affected by the Quantum Hot Standby state:
Hot Standby State Status of 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 Services
Client Services Client/Server Server Services
Services
EIP Global Modbus/EIP FTP SNMP HTTP
Scanner Data Messaging
unassigned not running run run run run run
primary CPU run run run run run run
standby CPU stop stop run run run run
offline stop stop run run run run
Hot Standby Switchover

The following table describes how the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 modules coordinate a
Hot Standby switchover. The 140 NOE 771 x1 module is used as the example in the following
procedure.
Step Action
1 In a Hot Standby configuration NOE A is running in the primary PLC and NOE B is in the standby
PLC.
2 NOE A detects that its PLC has changed from primary CPU to the offline mode.
3 NOE A changes from primary NOE to offline with the same Ethernet services running and starts
its watchdog timer (with a 500 ms time-out setting). It waits for a message to swap IP addresses
from NOE B.
4 NOE B detects that its PLC has changed state from standby PLC to primary CPU.
5 NOE B stops all its Ethernet services, sends a request to NOE A for the synchronization of the
IP address swap, starts its watchdog timer (with a 500 ms time-out setting) and waits for a
response from NOE A.
6 When NOE A receives the request from NOE B (or after the NOE A watchdog timer times out),
it stops all its Ethernet services:
 If it has received a request, NOE B sends a response to NOE A.
 If its watchdog timer has timed out, NOE B does not send a response.
NOE A then swaps its IP address and starts the secondary services.
7 NOE B swaps IP addresses and starts Ethernet services as the primary NOE.
8 After NOE A senses that its local CPU changes from offline to standby, it takes the secondary
IP address.
9 NOE B now becomes the primary NOE.
334 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
Step Action
10 NOE B opens all client connections, listens for all server connections, and reestablishes those
connections.
11 NOE A listens for all server connections and reestablishes those connections.
NOTE: During the Hot Standby switchover, there is a loss of communication during 500 ms
between the PLC and the HMI and/or Control Expert.
Going to Offline
When either the CPU stops or the Hot Standby CPU goes to offline mode, 2 events occur:
1. the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module goes to the offline mode
2. the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 module uses the IP address of the present configuration
The IP address assignment when going offline:
Hot Standby State IP Address Assigned Is...

primary CPU to offline configured IP address, if other controller does not go to primary
CPU mode
standby CPU to offline configured IP address + 1
NOTE: For more information, refer to the 140 NOE 771 x1 / 140 NOC 78• 00 IP Address
Assignment topic (see page 330).
33002479 10/2019 335

Hot Standby
NOE IP Address Swap Times
Description
The following table details the 140 NOE 771 •1module address swap times, such as the time to
close connections, time to swap IP addresses or time to establish connections:
Service Typical Swap Time Maximum Swap Time

Swap IP addresses 6 ms 500 ms
I/O Scanning 1 initial cycle of I/O scanning 500 ms + 1 initial cycle of I/O
scanning
Global data For swap times, please see the 500 ms + 1 CPU scan
Quantum NOE 771xx Ethernet
Modules User Guide (840 USE 116).
Client messaging 1 CPU scan 500 ms + 1 CPU scan
Server messaging 1 CPU scan + the time for the client to 500 ms + the time for the client to
reestablish the connection reestablish the connection
FTP/TFTP server The time for the client to reestablish 500 ms + the time for the client to
the connection reestablish the connection
SNMP 1 CPU scan 500 ms + 1 CPU scan
HTTP server The time for the client to reestablish 500 ms + the time for the client to
the connection reestablish the connection
336 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
Network Effects of Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Control Expert Solution
Overview
The Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Control Expert solution is a powerful feature of NOEs, a
feature that increases the reliability of your installation. Hot Standby uses a network, and using the
Hot Standby feature over a network can affect the behavior of:
 browsers
 remote and local clients
 I/O scanning service
 global data service
 FTP/TFTP server
The following are factors you may encounter while using the Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with
Control Expert solution.
Browsers
If a browser requests a page and during the process of downloading that page an IP address
switchover occurs, the browser either hangs or times out. Click the Refresh or Reload button.
Remote Clients
Hot Standby switchover affect remote clients.
A NOE module resets under the following conditions:
Remote Connection Request during Hot Standby : If a remote client establishes a TCP/IP
connection during a Hot Standby switchover, the server closes the connection using a TCP/IP
reset.
Hot Standby Switchover during Remote Connection Request : If a remote client makes a
connection request and a Hot Standby switchover occurs during the connection request, the
sever rejects the TCP/IP connection by sending a reset.
Outstanding Requests : If there is an outstanding request, the NOE module does not respond to
the request, but the NOE module does reset the connection.
The NOE module does a Modbus logout if any connection has logged in.
Local Clients
During a switchover, the NOE module resets all client connections using a TCP/IP reset.
33002479 10/2019 337

Hot Standby
I/O Scanning Service
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION - DEVICES GO TO THEIR FALLBACK STATES
DURING SWITCHOVER
Configure Ethernet output devices to their Hold Last Value fallback state whenever possible.
Output devices that support only a Set to Zero fallback state may produce a pulse during
switchover.
NOTE: When you select hold last in a 140 CPU 651 •0 coprocessor, the input data may fall back
to 0 when the I/O scanner health bits are NOT OKAY. Confirm that the I/O scanner health bits are
valid (OK=1) before removing the Ethernet cable to maintain hold last value.
I/O scanning provides the repetitive exchange of data with remote TCP/IP nodes I/O devices.
While the PLC is running, the primary CPU NOE sends Modbus read/write, read, or write requests
to remote I/O devices, and transfers data to and from the PLC memory. In the secondary controller,
the I/O scanning service is stopped.
When the Hot Standby switchover occurs, the primary CPU NOE closes all connections with I/O
devices by sending a TCP/IP reset. The I/O scanning service in this NOE is standby CPU.
After the switchover, the new primary CPU NOE re-establishes the connection with each I/O
devices. It restarts the repetitive exchange of data with these re-connections.
The module provide the I/O scanning feature. Configure this feature with the Control Expert
software.
Using either method, the configuration and transfer of data between network addresses can be
done without using the MSTR/IEC function block.
NOTE:
Account for the following Ethernet I/O scanning considerations during a switchover.
 If MSTR/IEC function block is used for TCP/IP, only some of the opcode is used. Therefore, the
block does not complete its transaction, and it returns error code 0•8000.
 While the NOE module is in the process of performing the transaction, a new MSTR/IEC
function block may become active.
 The output states of the scanned I/Os follows the state defined in the last value option
configured in the I/O scanning table of the NOE module (in Control Expert software).
These 2 states are either:
a. set to 0
b. hold last
With the above considerations, we recommend using switchover with Ethernet I/O scanning for
less critical applications.
338 33002479 10/2019

Hot Standby
Global Data (Publish/Subscribe) Service

The Hot Standby primary CPU NOE is 1 station within a distribution group. Distribution groups
exchange application variables. Exchanging application variables allows the system to coordinate
all the stations in the distribution group. Every station publishes local application variable in a
distribution group for all other stations and can subscribe to remote application variables
independent of the location of the producer.
The communication port has only 1 multicast address.
In this network service, the Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Control Expert controllers are
viewed like only 1 station. The primary CPU NOE publishes the Hot Standby application variables
and receives the subscription variables. The secondary NOE global data service is in a stopped
state.
When the Hot Standby switchover occurs, the primary CPU NOE stops the global data service. The
NOE module does not publish the local variable during a switchover. And after the switchover, the
new primary CPU NOE starts to publish application variables and to receive the subscription
variables.
FTP/TFTP Server
The FTP/TFTP server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address. Any FTP/TFTP
client can logon to the module. Access requires the correct user name and password. Modicon
Quantum Hot Standby with Control Expert allows only 1 active FTP/TFTP client session per NOE
module.
When the Hot Standby switchover occurs, the primary CPU and secondary NOEs close the
FTP/TFTP connection. If you send an FTP/TFTP request during the switchover, the
communication is closed.
Whenever you re-open communication, you must re-enter a user name and a password.
33002479 10/2019 339

Hot Standby
340 33002479 10/2019

33002479 10/2019
Appendices
Introduction
The appendices provide supplementary reference information for the Quantum 140 NOE 771 xx
series of modules and the 140 NWM 100 00 module.
What Is in This Appendix?

The appendix contains the following chapters:
A Maintenance 343
B Specifications 355
C Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus Application Protocol 357
D Installation and Configuration of a Modicon Quantum Platform 369
33002479 10/2019 341

342 33002479 10/2019
Maintenance
33002479 10/2019
Appendix A
Maintenance
Maintenance
Introduction
This chapter details information about system maintenance including accessing and clearing the
crash log and downloading the new NOE exec.

Topic Page
Responding to Errors 344
Reading and Clearing the Crash Log 349
Downloading a New NOE Exec 350
Downloading a New NOE Exec via FTP 351
Downloading a New NOE Kernel 353
33002479 10/2019 343

Maintenance
Responding to Errors
Overview
The following information describes how to respond to errors on the NOE module.
Detecting Errors
When faults occur, the NOE module’s LED display can help you determine what went wrong. The
following figure shows the pattern that the LEDs should display during normal operation.
The Run indicator will be solid. The Coll (collision) LED may flash, indicating that collisions are
occurring on the Ethernet network. Such collisions are normal.
If a fault occurs, the normal LEDs may be extinguished or other indicators may light. This topic
discusses errors reported by the Active, Ready, Coll, Link, Kernel, Appl and Fault indicators.
For each type of error, try the suggested remedies in the order given. If no remedy suggested here
overcomes the error, call your local service representative or call Schneider Electric customer
service at 1-800-468-5342 for further directions.
344 33002479 10/2019

Maintenance
Procedure for Responding to an Active LED Error Indicator

If the Active LED fails to light, the NOE module is not communicating with the backplane . The
following procedure describes the steps to perform to respond to an Active LED error.
Step Action
1 Make sure the NOE module and the controller are installed properly.
2 Verify that the controller is working; if it is not, replace it.
3 If neither the new controller nor the NOE module functions, replace the backplane.
4 Make sure that the number of network option modules (including NOE, NWM, NOM,
and CRP 811 modules) in the backplane is not exceeded:
 140 CPU 311 10: 2 modules
 140 CPU 670 60: 3 modules
 140 CPU 434 12A, 140 CPU 534 14A, 140 CPU 651 x0, 40 CPU 652 60,
140 CPU 658 60, 140 CPU 671 60, 140 CPU 672 60, 140 CPU 672 61,
140 CPU 678 61: 6 modules
5 Check the version of the controller executive. You must have version 2.0 or later to
support the Ethernet module. Earlier versions do not recognize the module.
6 If steps 4 and 5 above check out ok, replace the NOE module.
Procedure for Responding to a Ready LED Error Indicator

If the Ready LED fails to light, the NOE module has failed internal diagnostic tests. The following
procedure describes the steps to perform.
Step Action
1 Make sure that power has been applied to the backplane.
2 If step 1 checks out ok, replace the NOE module.
Procedure for Responding to a Link LED Error Indicator

If the Link LED fails to light, the NOE module is not communicating with the Ethernet hub/switch.
The following procedure describes the steps to perform to respond to a Link LED error.
Step Action
1 Make sure that the cable has been installed correctly and the module is functioning
properly.
2 Verify that the hub/switch is working properly.
3 If steps 1 and 2 check ok, replace the NOE module.
33002479 10/2019 345

Maintenance
Kernel LED Error

The following table describes the Kernel LED errors that may occur and how to respond to them.
If Then
The Ready LED is on and the Kernel LED is The module has detected an invalid software
flashing image.
The Ready LED is on and the Kernel LED is An attempt to download a software image has
shining steadily, failed and the module is in kernel mode.
Either of the above conditions exists. Download a new NOE Exec (see page 350).
Fault LED
The Fault LED will flash briefly following an error as the module attempts to recover.
The following figure shows the Fault LED.
346 33002479 10/2019

Maintenance
Collision LED Error

If the twisted pair cable has not been connected properly, the Coll LED will shine steadily and the
Link LED will be extinguished. (This condition does not occur with fiber optic modules.)
The following figure shows the Collision LED.
Procedure for Responding to a Collision LED Error

If the Collision LED fails to light, use the following procedure.
Step Action
1 Make sure that the cable has been installed and is working properly.
2 Verify that the Ethernet Hub/Switch is working properly.
33002479 10/2019 347

Maintenance
Collision LED Normal Condition

If the Coll LED is flashing, the module is reporting collisions on the Ethernet network. While such
collisions are normal, the frequency of the flashes is an indication of the volume of traffic on the
network. The flashes may be so frequent that the LED appears to be shining steadily. Heavy traffic
will slow communications. If response time is important to your application, you should consider
segmenting your network to reduce the frequency of collisions.
The following figure shows the Collision LED under normal conditions.
Run LED
The following table describes the action to be taken if the Run LED is flashing. The action depends
on the number of flashes in sequence.
Number of Flashes in Sequence Action

Three Check Ethernet connection
Four Change IP address
Five Provide IP address
Six Connect using default IP address and configure
Seven Download a new NOE Exec (see page 350)
Application LED
If the module crashes, it will note the reason in a log. If the module is able to recover, the Appl LED
will light, indicating that an entry has been made in the crash log. You can read and clear the crash
log (see page 349).
348 33002479 10/2019

Maintenance
Reading and Clearing the Crash Log
Overview
The following information describes the crash log.
Introduction
The crash log provides you with the ability to capture conditions that lead to an anomalous
condition. By providing the crash log to Schneider Electric technical support, you can facilitate their
assistance in resolving your problems.
NOTE: The crash log is provided with the understanding that, with a complex product in thousands
of customer applications, there may be conditions that require advance diagnostics. The crash log
is one of the tools used to solve complex problems.
The Crash Log

If the Appl (application) indicator is on, entries have been made in the crash log. The log may hold
up to 64K of entries.
Reading the Crash Log

The crash log can be read from the embedded web pages or via FTP.
Procedure for Reading the Crash Log via FTP

To access the crash log via FTP:
Step Action
1 Log in to the module’s FTP server.
2 Change the directory to wwwroot/conf/diag.
3 Perform an FTP to get the crash log file: get crash.log
Clearing the Crash Log

The crash log can be cleared from the embedded web pages or via FTP.
Procedure for Clearing the Crash Log via FTP

To access the crash log via FTP:
Step Action
1 Log in to the module’s FTP Server.
2 Change the directory to wwwroot/conf/diag.
3 Perform an FTP to delete the crash log file: rm crash.log
33002479 10/2019 349

Maintenance
Downloading a New NOE Exec
Introduction
The following tools can be used to download a new NOE Exec:
 Schneider Electric programming packages (see corresponding manuals)
 FTP
Use the OS loader to update the NOE Executive and web pages. (Refer to the Control Expert
documentation.)
350 33002479 10/2019

Maintenance
Downloading a New NOE Exec via FTP
Exec Version
Please check the current NOE Exec file version on the NOE Properties Web page.
Follow these links: | Diagnostics | NOE Properties |
Procedure
The following procedure describes the steps to use to download a new NOE Exec via FTP. An
example follows the procedure.
Step Action
1 At the DOS prompt, type FTP, followed by the IP Address and press Enter.
2 At the User prompt, type: USER and press Enter.
3 At the password prompt, enter your FTP Password and press Enter.
4 At the FTP prompt, type cd wwwroot/conf/exec and press Enter.
5 At the FTP prompt, type put and press Enter.
Note: Pay attention that the NOE771xx.bin has to be to the local path on your PC
(default path: c:\).
6 At the local file prompt, type NOE771xx.bin and press Enter.
7 At the remote file prompt, type NOE771xx.bin and press Enter.
8 After the transfer is complete you must reboot the NOE to allow the new EXEC to
become operational.
Note: The file name is case-sensitive and must be entered with the name in
uppercase and the extension in lowercase as shown in the figure below.
For example: NOE771xx.bin
33002479 10/2019 351

Maintenance
Sample FTP Session

The following FTP session was used to download an NOE Exec.
NOTE: The NOE Kernel can not be downloaded via FTP.
Reboot Information after FTP

NOTE: After downloading by FTP, reboot the module.
Perform a download or a reboot when your system can tolerate these actions.
352 33002479 10/2019

Maintenance
Downloading a New NOE Kernel
Procedure
The NOE Executive (Exec) adds a new feature that allows updating of the low level Kernel within
the NOE module’s firmware. For the proper installation of new kernel firmware, use the following
procedure.
Step Action
1 Check the current version of the NOE module’s Executive firmware (Exec file).
2 If the Exec is not the appropriate version, the Exec must be updated before updating
the Kernel.
3 Use the EXECLoader to load the latest version of the EXEC.
4 After loading the new Exec and before loading the Kernel, make sure to cycle power
to the NOE module.
5 Load the Kernel using the EXECLoader.
6 After the transfer displays as Successful, the NOE module needs approximately
1 minute to burn the new Kernel into its Flash memory.
7 The NOE module goes go through a reboot sequence.
Kernel Version
CAUTION
Failure to perform the preceding update procedure will render the NOE module inoperable.
The NOE Kernel can not be downloaded via FTP.

Please check the current NOE Kernel version on the NOE Properties (see page 322) Web page.
Follow these links: | Diagnostics | NOE Properties |
33002479 10/2019 353

Maintenance
354 33002479 10/2019

Specifications
33002479 10/2019
Appendix B
Specifications
Specifications
Specifications
140 NOE 771 •• Specification Table

The main specifications for the Quantum 140 NOE 771 xx Ethernet module are described in the
following table:
Communication Ports One auto-sensing 10/100 BASE-T shielded twisted pair (RJ-45 connector)
port and one 100 BASE-FX (MT-RJ connector) port. Both ports transmit
and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP/IP protocol
Bus Current Required 750 mA
Power Dissipation 3.8 W
Fuse None
Programming Software
Type and version Concept, Ver. 2.2, or higher
Unity Pro, Ver. 1.0, or higher
Modlink, Ver. 2.0, or higher
Modsoft, Ver. 2.6, or higher
ProWORX NxT, Ver. 2.1, or higher
Firmware
CPU Type and version Quantum Executive, Ver. 2.0, or higher
NOE Upgradeable Field Upgradeable via FTP or Programming Panel.
Operating Conditions
Temperature 0 to +60° C
Humidity 0 to 95% Rh non condensing @ 60° C
Altitude 15,000 ft (4500 m)
Vibration 10-57 Hz @ 0.0075 mm d.a
57-150 Hz @ 1 g
Storage Conditions
Temperature -40 to +85°C
Humidity 0 to 95% Rh non condensing @ 60°C
Free Fall 1 m unpackaged
Shock 3 shocks / axis, 15 g, 11 ms
33002479 10/2019 355

Specifications
140 NWM 100 00 Specification Table

The main specifications for the Quantum 140 NWM 100 00 Ethernet module are described in the
following table:
Specification Description
Communication Ports One auto-sensing 10/100 BASE-T shielded twisted pair (RJ-45
connector) port and one 100 BASE-FX (MT-RJ connector) port.
Both ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated
in TCP/IP protocol
Bus Current Required 900 mA
Power Dissipation 4.5 W
Fuse None
Programming Software
Type and version Concept, Ver. 2.6, or higher
Unity Pro, Ver. 1.0, or higher
Firmware
CPU Type and version Quantum Executive, Ver. 2.6, or higher
NOE Upgradeable Field Upgradeable via FTP or Programming Panel.
Operating Conditions
Temperature 0 to +60° C
Humidity 0 to 95% Rh non-condensing @ 60° C
Altitude 15,000 ft (4500 m)
Vibration 10-57 Hz @ 0.0075 mm d.a
57-150 Hz @ 1 g
Storage Conditions
Temperature -40 to +85°C
Humidity 0 to 95% Rh non-condensing @ 60°C
Free Fall 1 m unpackaged
Shock 3 shocks/axis, 15 g, 11 ms
Immunity
International Standard IEC 61131-2
US Standard UL 508
European Standard EN61131-2, EN50081-2
Canadian Standard CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 142
Agency Approvals UL: UL 508
CSA: CSA 142
CE: EN61131-2
Factory Mutual Class 1 Division 2
356 33002479 10/2019

Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus Application Protocol
33002479 10/2019
Appendix C
Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus Application Protocol
Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus Application Protocol
Introduction
This chapter describes the Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus Application Protocol.

Topic Page
Modbus Application Protocol Overview 358
Modbus Application Protocol PDU 360
Modbus Application Protocol Service Classes 362
Modbus Application Protocol PDU Analysis 363
TCP/IP Specific Issues 365
Closing a TCP Connection 366
Reference Documents 367
33002479 10/2019 357

Modbus Application Protocol Overview
Introduction
The following information describes the Modbus Application Protocol (MBAP).
The Modbus Application Protocol (MBAP) is a layer-7 protocol providing peer-to-peer
communication between programmable logic controllers (PLCs) and other host-based nodes on a
LAN. Collectively, these nodes implement all or part of a control application used for industrial
automation applications in the automotive, tire and rubber, food and beverage, and utilities
industries, to name a few
Client-Server Communications
Modbus protocol transactions are typical request-response message pairs between a client node
and a server node. These nodes function as follows
Client : The node that initiates a data transaction is called a client. The Modicon Quantum Ethernet
module provides the user with the capability to transfer data to and from nodes on a TCP/IP
network using a communication instruction. All PLCs that support networking communication
capabilities over Ethernet can use either the MBP_MSTR Ladder Logic instruction to read or
write controller information or IEC communication blocks.
Server : The node that receives an inquiry is the server. Using the standard Modbus/TCP protocol,
the Modicon Quantum Ethernet module provides access to controller data. Any device, PC, HMI
package, another PLC, or any Modbus/TCP compliant device can access data from the PLC.
The Modbus/TCP server also allows programming panels to log into the controller over
Ethernet.
Modbus requests contain function codes representing several classes of service including data
access, online programming, and program download and upload classes. Modbus responses can
be ACKs with and without data, or NACKs with error information.
The Modbus Application Protocol can be transmitted over any communication system that
supports messaging services. However, the current Quantum implementation transports Modbus
Application Protocol PDUs over TCP/IP. The Quantum PLC accommodates both Ethernet II and
IEEE 802.3 framing, although Ethernet II framing is the default.
358 33002479 10/2019

Limitations
The Modicon Quantum Ethernet module supports up to 64 simultaneous Modbus/TCP server
connections. To guarantee consistency of changes to the controller configuration, the module
allows only one programming panel to be logged in at a time.
The module supports these Modbus/TCP commands:
 Read Data
 Write Data
 Read/Write Data
 Get Remote Statistics
 Clear Remote Statistics
 Modbus 125 Commands (used by programming panels to download a new exec to the module
For More Information

For more information about Modbus communications, consult the Modbus Protocol Reference
Guide (PI-MBUS-300). For more information about communication blocks, consult Chapter 4,
Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks (see page 119).
33002479 10/2019 359

Modbus Application Protocol PDU
Overview
The following information describes the structure and content of the Modbus Application Protocol
PDU.
Description
The Modbus Application Protocol PDU, mbap_pdu, is received at TCP port number 502. The
current maximum size of the mbap_pdu for this class of services is 256 bytes. The structure and
content of the mbap_pdu is defined to be:
mbap_pdu::={inv_id[2], proto_id[2], len[2],dst_idx[1], data=mb_pdu}
The header is seven bytes long and includes the fields listed in the following table:
Field Description
inv_id [2 bytes] invocation id used for transaction pairing
proto_id [2 bytes] used for intra-system multiplexing, default is 0 for Modbus services
len [2 bytes] the len field is a byte count of the remaining fields, and it includes the
dst_id and data fields
The remainder of the pdu includes two fields:
Field Description
dst_idx [1 byte] destination index is used for intra-system routing of packets (currently
not implemented)
data [n bytes] this is the service portion of the Modbus pdu, mb_pdu, and it is defined
below
The service portion of the Modbus Application Protocol, called mb_pdu, contains two fields:
mb_pdu::={func_code[1], data[n]}
The following table describes the fields in mb_pdu.:
Field Description
func_code{1 byte Modbus function code
data [n bytes] this field is function code dependent and usually
contains information such as variable references, variable
counts, and data offsets
The size and content of the data field are dependent on the value of the function code.
360 33002479 10/2019

Example
Here are the values for a sample mbap_pdu for reading a register:
00 01 00 00 00 06 01 03 00 00 00 01
The following table shows the structure and content for this example:
inv_id 00 01
proto_id 00 00
len 00 00
dst_idx 01
func_code 03
data 00 00 00 01
33002479 10/2019 361

Modbus Application Protocol Service Classes
Introduction
There are several classes of service that are part of the Modbus Application Protocol. Each of
these classes is described below.
Data Access
Read/write both discrete and analog data values from PLC register files.
Online Programming
Services make relatively minor alterations to ladder logic programs with a highly controlled
introduction of these changes into the executing program.
Image Download/Upload
Image download services support the downloading of a ladder logic control program to the PLC.
Image upload services support the uploading of a ladder logic control program from a PLC to PC
host for archival/backup purposes.
Configuration
Configuration services allow the user to define parameter values which affect the PIC’s register
files, I/O map, communication port configuration and scan attributes, to name a few.
Device Execution State Control

The class of service allows the user to start/stop the PLC scan execution. These services require
the user to be in an application login context which is obtained through other Modbus services.
362 33002479 10/2019

Modbus Application Protocol PDU Analysis
Overview
The following information provides an analysis of the Modbus Application Protocol.
Analysis
The Modbus Application Protocol PDU is transmitted over a TCP/IP Ethernet stack. Both Ethernet
II and IEEE 802.3 framing will be accommodated. Ethernet II framing is the default.
. . . from the wire in for IEEE 802.3 framing . . .
. . . is IEEE 802.3 framing if length <=1500 . . .802.3_pdu ::=
{dst_addr[6], src_addr[6], length[2], data=802.2_pdu} *an IEEE 802.3
PDU has a maxFrameSize of 1518 octets
*an IEEE 802.3 PDU has a minFrameSize of 64 octets802.2_pdu : {dsap[1],
ssap[1], frm_cntrl[1], snap_hdr[5], data=ip_pdu} *the snap_hdr is
associated with a "well-known" 802.2 sap snap_hdr
::={org_code[3], ethertype[2] }
*the snap hdr (sub network access protocol) allows the older style
Ethernet protocols to run on the newer IEEE 802.2 interface. The
ethertype parameter indicates the service, ex. ip or arp. IP has a
value
0x800. . . . from the wire in for Ethernet II framing . . .
. . . is Ethernet II framing if length >1500 . . .802.3_pdu ::=
{dst_addr[6], src_addr[6], length[2], data=ip_pdu} . . . the common
part of the packet begins here . . .ip_pdu ::= {ip_hdr[20],
data=tcp_pdu}tcp_pdu ::= {tcp_hdr[24], data=appl_pdu=mbap_pdu}
The mbap_pdu is the Modbus Application Protocol whose messages are received at a well-known
port. The current maximum size of the mbap_pdu for this class of services in 256 bytes.
33002479 10/2019 363

Structure and Content

The structure and content of the mbap_pdu is defined to be:
mbap_pdu ::={ inv_id[2], proto_id[2], len[2], dst_idx[1], data=mb_pdu
}The header is 7 bytes long, and includes the following fields:
inv_id [2 bytes] invocation id used for transaction pairing
proto_id [2 bytes] used for intra-system multiplexing, default is
0 for Modbus
services len [2 bytes] the len field is a byte count
of the remaining fields and
includes the dst_id and data fields.
The remainder of the pdu includes two fields:
dst_idx [1 byte] destination index is used for intra-system
routing of
packets. (currently not implemented) data [n bytes]
this is the service portion of the Modbus pdu, mb_pdu, and is
defined below
The service portion of the Modbus Application Protocol, called mb_pdu, contains 2 fields:
mb_pdu ::= { func_code[1], data[n] }
func_code [1 byte] MB function code data [n bytes]
this field is function code dependent and usually contains
information such as variable references, variable counts, and data
offsets.
The size and content of the data field are dependent on the value of the function code.
364 33002479 10/2019

TCP/IP Specific Issues
Overview
The following information describes some TCP/IP specific issues.
Broadcast/Multicast
Although broadcast and/or multicast are supported by both IP network address and IEEE 802.3
MAC address, the Modbus Application Protocol does not support either broadcast or multicast at
the application layer.
Schneider Electric’s Quantum PLCs use broadcast addressing because they use ARP as the
means of locating the destination node. The client interface to the Modbus Application Protocol
service on the PLC, the MBP_MSTR block, requires the user to provide the destination IP address.
Also the embedded stack does use a pre-configured default gateway IP address in the case where
ARP does not succeed.
TCP Port Number

Schneider Electric has obtained a well-known system port from an Internet Authority. Schneider
Electric’s well-known system port number is 502. The Internet Authority assigned the system port
number 502 to asa-appl-proto with Dennis Dubé as the company point of contact.
This port number allows Schneider Electric to transport various application protocols over with TCP
or UDP. The particular protocol is indicated by the value of the proto_id parameter in the
mbap_pdu. Currently the only assignment is 0 meaning Modbus Application Protocol.
33002479 10/2019 365

Closing a TCP Connection
Overview
A TCP connection can be closed by one of the following:
 a remote station (which closes a connection by sending a TCP/IP connection closure message)
 the local PLC
When the Maximum Number of Connections are Open

If the PLC receives a request to open a new connection when the maximum number of connections
has been reached, the PLC:
 closes an open but inactive connection
- then -
 opens a new connection
To identify which connection to close, the PLC examines groups of connections for inactive open
connections, in the following sequence:
1 non-referenced connections to devices that are not configured as part of the Control Expert
application
2 client connections
3 server connections
If the PLC discovers one or more inactive connections in the first group, it closes the oldest inactive
connection in that group then opens a new connection.
If no inactive connection is discovered in the first group, the PLC examines the second group of
connections and, if it discovers one or more inactive connections in the second group, the PLC
closes the oldest inactive connection in that group and opens a new connection.
If no inactive connection is discovered in the first and second groups, the PLC examines the third
group and, if it discovers one or more inactive connections in the third group, the PLC closes the
oldest inactive connection in that group and opens a new connection.
If the PLC fails to discover an inactive connection in any of the three groups, no open connection
is closed and no new connection can be opened.
NOTE: Closure of a connection is indicated to the application by means of a status report
(message refused) on any exchanges in progress.
366 33002479 10/2019

Reference Documents
Overview
The following information provides a list of reference documents that you may find helpful.
Introduction
Following is a list of related documentation.
 ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3-1985, ISO DIS 8802/3, ISBN - 0-471-82749-5, May 1988
 ANSI/IEEE Std 802.2-1985, ISO DIS 8802/2, ISBN 0-471-82748-7, Feb 1988
 RFC793, TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) DARPA Internet Program Protocol
Specification, Sep 1981
 RFC 791, IP (Internet Protocol) DARPA Internet Protocol Specification, Sep 1981
 RFC826, An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), David Plummer, NIC Sep 1982
 RFC1042, A Standard for the Transmission of IP Datagrams over IEEE 802.2 Networks, Postel
& Reynolds, ISI, Feb 1988
 RFC 792, ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) DARPA Internet C Control Message
Protocol Specification, Jon Postel, Sep 1981
 RFC951, BOOTSTRAP PROTOCOL (BOOTP), Bill Croft and John Gilmore, September 1985
 RFC783, The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) rev 2, K.R. Solons MIT, June 1981
33002479 10/2019 367

368 33002479 10/2019

Installation and Configuration
33002479 10/2019
Appendix D
Installation and Configuration of a Modicon Quantum Platform
Installation and Configuration of a Modicon Quantum Platform
Overview
This quick start guide describes how to install and configure a Modicon Quantum Ethernet module.
It also sets up the I/O scanning service to allow data transfer to occur between the PLC and a
remote slave device. Instructions for connecting to the module’s embedded web server pages are
also provided at the end of the guide.

Topic Page
Overview 370
Installation 371
Configuring the Rack with Control Expert 372
Configuring the Ethernet Network with Control Expert 375
Configuring the I/O Scanning Service 378
Building and Downloading the Configuration Program 384
Diagnosing the Ethernet Module Using the Web Server 388
33002479 10/2019 369

Overview
Introduction
This quick start guide explains how to install and configure Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules
and set up a I/O scanning communication service. The following types of modules are applicable
to this guide:
 140 NOE 771 01
 140 NOE 771 11
 140 CPU 651 50
 140 CPU 651 60
Hardware/Software Requirements
For the example discussed in this guide, the following Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules are
required:
 140 CPS 114 x0 power supply
 140 CPU 651 50 CPU
 140 NOE 77101 communication module
Also, a PC running Windows 2000 or XP with Schneider’s Control Expert configuration software
installed on it is required.
Finally, either a USB or a Modbus cable is required to connect the PC to the network PLC.
Intended Audience
This user guide is intended for anyone who is involved in installing and configuring Modicon
Quantum Ethernet modules in a network arrangement that can perform a variety of communication
services.
Anyone reading this guide should:
 be familiar with Ethernet networks and the TCP/IP protocol
 understand the operation of PLCs
370 33002479 10/2019

Installation
Introduction
The Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules used for the example in this guide may vary from the
ones available at your site. You can substitute the appropriate power supply, CPU, and Ethernet
communication module(s) and other Quantum modules to make up a rack similar to the one
described below.
Assembling the Rack

Assemble the modules into the rack as follows:
Step Action
1 Insert the power supply into the leftmost slot (1) on the rack.
2 Add the CPU to the next two slots (2 & 3)on the right of the power supply.
3 Place the remaining Quantum communication modules, beginning with slot 4,
to complete your installation.
In our example (see below), we use a CPS 114 x0 power supply, a CPU 651 50 processor, and a
single NOE 771 01 Ethernet module to make up our rack.
33002479 10/2019 371

Configuring the Rack with Control Expert
Introduction
We begin this procedure by configuring the Modicon Quantum Ethernet module rack using
Control Expert configuration program.
Configuring the Rack

Using a PC loaded with Control Expert software, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Start Control Expert software.
4 Select New in the File menu to create a New Project dialog box.
5 In the New Project dialog box, expand the Quantum family to select the installed processor (the
140 CPU 65150 in our example).
372 33002479 10/2019

Step Action
6 In the project browser, double-click Station → Configuration → PLC bus to access the configuration of
the local rack (shown below).
33002479 10/2019 373

Step Action
7 Double-click slot 4 to bring up the New Device menu to show the hardware catalog.
8 Double-click the module that goes in slot 4 (140 NOE 771 01 in our example, shown above).
Note: Alternately, you can click the module and drag it to the selected slot on the rack.
9 Repeat step 8 for each module included in your configuration.
The figure below shows the completed rack assembly for our example with the 140 NOE
771 01 module in slot 4.
374 33002479 10/2019

Configuring the Ethernet Network with Control Expert
Introduction
The following procedure describes how to add a new Ethernet network and link it to the Modicon
Quantum module we configured in the previous section.
Setting Up the Network

Perform the following steps to add the Ethernet network:
Step Action
1 Locate the Communications directory in the Project browser.
2 Right-click the Network subdirectory located under the Communications
directory.
3 Select the New Network option to bring up the Add Network dialog box.
4 Scroll to Ethernet in the List of available Networks box.
5 Enter a meaningful name for your network in the Change Name field
(NOE77101 was used in our example).
6 Click OK.
33002479 10/2019 375

Linking the Network to the NOE 77101 Module

Perform the following steps to link the new logical Ethernet network with the NOE 77101 module.
Step Action
1 Double-click Local Bus in the Project browser to show the rack configuration.
2 Expand the Local Quantum Drop to show the ETHERNET port under the 140
NOE 77101.
3 Double-click the ETHRNET port to bring up the network link screen.

4 Under Please choose a network, scroll to locate the name of your logical
network (NOE77101 in our example).
5 Click the validate check box in the upper toolbar to confirm the network link
configuration.
376 33002479 10/2019

Assigning an IP Address to the 140 NOE 771 01 Module

Perform the following steps to assign an IP address to the 140 NOE 771 01 communication
module.
Step Action
1 Locate the Communications\Networks directory in the Project browser.
2 Double-click your new logical network (NOE77101 in our example) to open the
NOE077101 configuration screen.
3 Click Configured in the IP Address Configuration group (circled area shown

above).
Note: Be sure to contact your network administrator and request the IP,
Subnetwork mask, and Gateway addresses prior to performing the next step.
4 Enter the appropriate values in the IP address, Subnetwork mask, and
Gateway address text fields.
5 Click the validate check box in the upper tool bar to confirm the IP configuration
settings.
33002479 10/2019 377

Configuring the I/O Scanning Service
Introduction
The Modicon 140 NOE 771 01 module supports Ethernet communication services such as I/O
scanning, Global Data, Modbus messaging, SNMP, etc. This example shows you how to configure
the I/O scanning service. This service is used to:
 transfer data between network devices
 allow a CPU to regularly read data from and write data to scanned devices
Selecting the I/O Scanning Parameters

Perform the following steps to setup the I/O scanning parameters:
Step Action
1 Open the Control Expert program on your PC.
2 In the Project Browser, locate the Communication → Networks sub-directory.
3 Click the network name (140 NOE 771 01 in our example) to open the module configuration table.
4 In the Module Utilities dialog, select Yes in the I/O Scanning field:
5 Click the I/O Scanning tab to display the I/O scanning configuration screen:
6 Type in the parameter settings under each of the column headings for the I/O Scanner Configuration.
Refer to the parameter definitions below.
378 33002479 10/2019

Step Action
7 Click the validate check box in the upper tool bar to confirm the I/O scanning parameter settings.
Health Block
The Health Block (number 1 in previous figure) lets you define the first word or bit in a health table.
That table can be up to 8 words (%IW) or 128 bits (%I) in length. Each bit in the table represents
the status of an individual device. The table below shows how the bits are displayed based on the
data type you use.
Bit Data Type

%I %IW
1 %I1 %IW1.0
2 %I 2 %IW1.1
...
16 %I16 %IW1.15
17 %I17 %IW2.0
By default, the table comprises words starting at %IW1.0. If you want to set the table to bits, you
need to specify a %I value in an increment of 16 (%I1, %I16, %I32, etc.).
NOTE: The Health Block is available only for the NOE 771 00, -01, and -11. It is not available for
the CPU 651 x0.
NOTE: For Safety Monitor applications, the Health Block is mapped on %M/%MW from the UMA
zone instead of %I/%IW.
33002479 10/2019 379


The Device Control Block (number 2 in previous figure) lets you disable any scanned device by
setting a bit associated with that device to 1. The I/O scanner closes the connection and sets the
Health Bit to 0 (unhealthy state).
To enable the Device Control Block select the check box in the I/O Scanner configuration dialog
(number 2 in previous figure).
NOTE:
To enable the Device Control Block, use:
 Unity Pro at V2.0 or later
 a 140 NOE 771 01 or 140 NOE 771 11at version 3.5 or later
 a 140 CPU 651 x0 at version 2.0 or later
If you attempt to enable the Device Control Block with an earlier version of the firmware, the I/O
scanning service is disabled.
If the check box is not selected, the I/O scanner service is enabled, and you cannot disable the I/O
scanning of individual devices.
Disabling I/O scanning with the Device Control Block is equivalent to ending communication
between the scanner and the device. Therefore:
 The fallback positions are applied to the inputs by the scanner.
 Communication with the device stops.
 All entries in the IN and OUT tables transfer between the CPU and the scanner on each scan.
As a consequence of the last point above, if you modify a %MWi attached to an input, this %MWi
is overwritten by the values coming from the I/O scanner in the next scan (with either 0 or the last
input value).
It is possible (but meaningless) to access %MW attached to the outputs because they are not
transmitted to the device.

The Repetitive Rate Step (number 3 in previous figure) is set in multiples of 5 ms (the minimum)
through 200 ms (the maximum).
The Repetitive Rate column is where you enter a rate of time for how often you want the I/O
scanner to send a query to the device after the rate has timed out.
NOTE: The repetitive rate of the I/O scanner table is a multiple of the rate displayed in the
Repetitive Rate Step. The real repetitive rate being executed by the I/O scanner service is shown
in the Repetitive Rate column.
Note: An entry in the Repetitive Rate column is rounded up to the next multiple that was entered
in the Repetitive Rate Step if the entry is not a multiple of the Repetitive Rate Step.
For example, if the entry in the Repetitive Rate Step is 5 and you enter a 7 in the Repetitive Rate
column, the 7 is rounded up to 10; if you change the Repetitive Rate Step to 6 and enter a 7 in the
Repetitive Rate column, the 7 is rounded up to 12.
380 33002479 10/2019

I/O Scanner Table Parameters

The I/O Scanner parameters are described in the table below:

Entry # This is the first column; it has no name.
Valid range: 1 ... 128
Each entry represents an I/O Scanning exchange on the
network.
IP address This is the IP address of the scanned Ethernet slave device. 192.168.1.100
Device Name To configure a device (Advantys island or DTM), click the ... MySTB1 or
button to open the Property box (see page 224) to start the Master_PRM_DTM_10
device configuration software.
For an introduction to this procedure for Advantys, go here
(see page 214).
For an introduction to this procedure for DTMs, go FDT
Container (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating
Modes).
NOTE: While the Property box is open, Property cannot be
edited.
Unit ID This field associates the slave address of the device connected 255
to an Ethernet/Modbus gateway with the IP address of that
gateway:
 Value range: 1 to 255
 Default value: 255
NOTE:
 When using a bridge, enter the bridge index (1 to 255) in this
field.
 If you are copying the I/O scanning configuration from a
140 NOE 771 •• to a 140 NOC 771 ••, set the Unit ID to a
value from 1 to 254.
Slave Syntax Use this drop-down menu to pick the way RD Ref Slave and WR Index (default value)
Ref Slave values are displayed. There are 4 types of display
available:
 Index: 100
 Modbus: 400101
 (Modbus register)
 IEC 0: %MW100
 M340 and Premium PLC slaves
 IEC 1: %MW101
 Quantum PLC slaves
33002479 10/2019 381


Health Timeout This field sets the maximum interval between the responses 1500 ms
(ms) from a remote device. After this time period expires, the
received data is invalid. The Health Timeout must be longer
than the Repetitive Rate time (ms). For a Quantum
140 NOE771 01 Ethernet module, it also should be longer than
the CPU scan time.
For the Health Timeout:
 Range: 1 ms to 50 s
 Interval: 1 ms
Repetitive Rate The rate at which data is scanned, in multiples of 16 ms. 64 ms

(ms)
RD Master Destination address in the master PLC where, from each %MW10
Object* device, newly read information is stored
RD Slave Ref.** Source address index in the slave/remote device The format of this value
depends on the Slave
Syntax:
 Index: 5
 Modbus: 400006
 IEC 0: %MW5
 IEC 1: %MW6
RD length Number of words to read 10

Using these examples, Master Object 140 NOE 771 01 reads data from address 192.168.1.100 starting at
index 5. It puts the data into the NOE address starting at %MW10 using a read size of 10 words.
Last value This field configures the behavior of inputs in the event of an Hold last
(Input) access error in relation to the remote device (for example:
NOTE: When you select
inoperative network or device power supply, etc.):
hold last in a
 Set to 0: fall back to 0
140 CPU 651 •0
 Hold last: maintain last value
coprocessor, the input
data may fall back to 0
when the I/O scanner
health bits are NOT
OKAY. Confirm that the
I/O scanner health bits
are valid (OK=1) before
removing the Ethernet
cable to maintain hold last
value.
WR Master Source address of the master PLC whose data is being written %MW20
Object* into the slave/remote device.
Write operations are always performed at the word level.
382 33002479 10/2019


WR Slave Ref.** The address of the first word written into the slave/remote The format of this value
device. depends on the Slave
Syntax:
 Index: 100
 Modbus: 400101
 IEC 0: %MW100
 IEC 1: %MW101
WR length Number of words to be written 1

Using these examples, Master Object 140 NOE 771 01 writes data from address %MW20 to slave address
192.168.1.100 starting at index 100. It puts the data into the NOE address starting at %MW5 using a write size
of 1 word.
Gateway/Bridge To allow slower TCP/IP network devices (i.e., gateways and
Device bridges) to be compatible with the I/O Scanner:
 Select the check box to enable this feature. Defines a new
bit, and sets it to high (1).
 De-select the check box to disable this feature (default).
Defines a new bit, and sets it to zero (0).
Description Additional information
*Master refers to the client PLC that makes the request.
**Slave refers to the server from which data is read or to which data is written.
NOTE: For more information, refer to the Contextual Menu for Copy/Cut/Paste topic
(see page 210).
NOTE: For more information, refer to the I/O Scanning with Multiple Lines topic (see page 212).
33002479 10/2019 383

Building and Downloading the Configuration Program
Building the Program

Next, you need to build the whole program before downloading it to the PLC. To do this, select
Build\Rebuild All Project in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen (shown below). If it is successful,
a Process succeeded message will appear at the program’s completion.
Connection Options
In order to run the configuration program it must first be downloaded to the PLC. Prior to
downloading the program, the PLC must be connected to the PC containing the Control Expert
software. The connection can be accomplished using a communication network such as Ethernet,
USB, Modbus, or Modbus Plus cabling. We describe both the USB and Modbus cable setups in
the following examples.
384 33002479 10/2019

Connecting the PC to the PLC with a USB Cable

Proceed as follows to connect the PC to the PLC with USB.
Step Action
1 Ensure that the Quantum system is powered up.
2 Connect the PLC to the PC with a USB cable.
3 On the PC, click the Control Expert PLC\Set Address tab to bring up the Set Address dialog box.
4 Select USB in the PLC Media box.

5 Leave the PLC Address field blank.
6 Click OK.
7 Proceed to Downloading and Running the Configuration Program (see page 387).
33002479 10/2019 385

Connecting the PC to the PLC with a Modbus Cable

Proceed as follows to connect the PC to the PLC with Modbus.
Step Action
1 Ensure that the Quantum system is powered up.
2 Connect the PLC to the PC with a Modbus cable.
3 On the PC, click the Control Expert PLC\Set Address tab to bring up the Set Address menu.
4 Select MODBUS01 in the PLC Media field.

5 Enter the Modbus address in the PLC Address field (the default address is 1).
Note: You can also use the keypad on the 140 CPU 651 50 module to enter or change the
Modbus address.
6 Click OK.
7 Proceed to Downloading and Running the Configuration Program (below).
386 33002479 10/2019

Downloading and Running the Configuration Program

Once the PC and the PLC are physically connected (above steps), the I/O scanning program can
be downloaded to the PLC.
Step Action
1 On the PC, select PLC \Connect on the Control Expert screen.
2 Click the PLC\Transfer Project to PLC tab to bring up the Transfer Project to PLC dialog box.
3 Click the Transfer button to download the program to the PLC.

4 When the confirm screen appears, click OK.
5 Click Run on the Control Expert upper toolbar to start the program.
33002479 10/2019 387

Diagnosing the Ethernet Module Using the Web Server
Introduction
Quantum Ethernet modules have an embedded web server that provides web pages to diagnose
the Ethernet module services, such as statistics, I/O scanning, Messages, global data, etc. You
can access an Ethernet module's web pages by entering the IP address of the module in the web
browser. No password is required to display the home page. From the NOE home page, you can
access the Monitoring, Diagnostics, and Setup pages.
You can also use the module’s LED display to diagnose problems. For information regarding the
module’s LED display refer to the Quantum NOE 771xx Ethernet Modules User Manual.
Accessing the Ethernet Module’s Web Page

To access the NOE 771 01 module’s web page, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 At the PC, start a Web browser such as Internet Explorer.
2 Enter the NOE 771 01’s currently assigned IP address in the Address field of
the browser to bring up the NOE’s home page.
3 Click the Diagnostics tab.

4 Enter a user name and password (the default is USER for both).
Note: Check with your system administrator to see if the user name and
password have been changed.
388 33002479 10/2019

Step Action
5 Click OK to bring up the NOE diagnostic web page.
6 Click the I/O Scanning link on the left-hand side of the screen to access the I/O
scanning diagnostics web page.
33002479 10/2019 389

390 33002479 10/2019

Glossary
33002479 10/2019
Glossary
A
ACK
Acknowledgement
address
On a network, the identification of a station. In a frame, a grouping of bits that identifies the frame’s
source or destination.
API
Application Program Interface. The specification of functions and data used by one program
module to access another; the programming interface that corresponds to the boundary between
protocol layers.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. A network layer protocol used to determine the physical address that
corresponds to the IP address for a host on the network. ARP is a sub-protocol that operates under
TCP/IP.
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation. Grammar used to define a protocol (OSI scope)
B
BOOTP
BOOTstrap Protocol. A protocol used at power-up in order to get an IP address that is provided by
a BOOTP server and is based on the module’s MAC address.
bps
Bits per second.
bridge
A device that connects two or more physical networks that use the same protocol. Bridges read
frames and decide whether to transmit or block them based on their destination address.
BSP
Board Support Package. A software package that maps a specific real-time operating system
(RTOS0 onto a specific hardware.
C
client
A computer process requesting service from other computer processes.
33002479 10/2019 391

Glossary
Cyclic Data Exchange

Provides data transfer between two or more NOE 771 xx controllers on a TCP/IP network.
D
default gateway
The IP address of the network or host to which all packets addressed to an unknown network or
host are sent. The default gateway is typically a router or other device.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. An improved version of BOOTP.
DHCP Client
Host on the network obtaining its configuration from a DHCP Server.
DHCP Server
Server providing configuration parameters to a DHCP Client.
DNS
Domain Name System. A protocol within TCP/IP used to find IP addresses based on host names
F
FactoryCast
An embedded Web server that the user customizes, permitting user access to controller
diagnostics and Ethernet configuration.
field
A logical grouping of contiguous bits that convey one kind of information, such as the start or end
of a message, an address, data, or an error check.
firewall
A gateway that controls access to a network or an application.
frame
A group of bits that form a discrete block of information. Frames contain network control
information or data. The size and composition of a frame is determined by the network technology
being used.
framing types
Two common framing types are Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. The protocol (over TCP) used to read or write a file into a remote station
(the FTP server side).
392 33002479 10/2019

Glossary
G
gateway
A device that connects networks with dissimilar network architectures and that operates at the
Application Layer. This term may refer to a router.
Global Data (Publish / Subscribe)
Service of inter PLC synchronization (shared databases).
H
half duplex
(HDX) A method of data transmission capable of communication in two directions, but only one
direction at a time.
host
A node on a network.
hostname
A domain name given to a specific computer on a network and used to address that computer.
HTTP
A domain name given to a specific computer on a network and used to address that computer.
hub
A device that connects a series of flexible and centralized modules to create a network.
I
I/O Drop
One or two (depending on the system type) Remote I/O Channels consisting of a fixed number of
I/O points.
I/O Map
An area in the controller configuration memory used to map input and output points. Previously
called traffic cop.
I/O Scan
A procedure the processor follows to monitor inputs and control outputs.
I/O Scan List
A configuration table that identifies the targets with which repetitive communication is authorized.
I/O scanner
Software component that is in charge of scanning Ethernet based Momentum IO in order to get
inputs and set outputs.
33002479 10/2019 393

Glossary
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol. A protocol within TCP/IP used to report errors in datagram
transmission.
Internet
The global interconnection of TCP/IP based computer communication networks.
IP
Internet Protocol. A common network layer protocol. IP is most often used with TCP.
IP Address
Internet Protocol Address. A 32-bit address assigned to hosts using TCP/IP.
L
layer
In the OSI model, a portion of the structure of a device that provides defined services for the
transfer of information.
Legacy
In the sense of network communication: Existing Components (PLC products etc.) that do not
provide special (hardware) support for Control Intranet.
M
MAC Address
Media Access Control address. The hardware address of a device. A MAC address is assigned to
an Ethernet TCP/IP module in the factory.
MBAP
Modbus Application Protocol
MBP_MSTR
A special master instruction that uses ladder logic to read and write controller information.
MIB
Management Information Base. Database that holds the configuration of a SNMP enabled device.
Modbus
A communication system that links Modicon controllers with intelligent terminals and computers
over common carrier or dedicated lines
N
NACK
Negative acknowledgment indicating an error.
394 33002479 10/2019

Glossary
NDDS
Network Data Delivery Services.
NetLink
The logical name of a network.
network
Interconnected devices sharing a common data path and protocol for communication.
node
An addressable device on a communications network.
NTP
Network Time Protocol. A protocol used to synchronize the time of a client or server to the time of
another server or referenced source like a satellite receiver.
O
OIT / OID
Object Information True / Object ID (identify OIT) Contain databases managing SNMP (MIBs)
OSI model
Open System Interconnection model. A reference standard describing the required performance
of devices for data communication. Produced by the International Standards Organization.
P
packet
The unit of data sent across a network.
Peer Cop
Software that allows you to configure data blocks to be transferred between controllers on a
Modbus Plus network.
PING
Packet Internet Groper. A program used to test whether a destination on a network can be
reached.
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
port
An access point for data entry or exit within a host using TCP services.
protocol
Describes message formats and a set of rules used by two or more devices to communicate using
those formats.
33002479 10/2019 395

Glossary
R
repeater
A device that connects two sections of a network and conveys signals between them without
making routing decisions or filtering packets.
RFC
Request For Comment. Paper identified by a number in Internet world. They define the state of art
regarding Internet protocols (ruled by IETF = Internet Engineering Task Force) http://www.ietf.org
router
A device that connects two or more sections of a network and allows information to flow between
them. A router examines every packet it receives and decides whether to block the packet from the
rest of the network or transmit it. The router will attempt to send the packet through the network by
the most efficient path.
S
server
Provides services to clients. This term may also refer to the computer on which the service is
based.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A common protocol used to transfer e-mail messages.
SNMP
socket
The association of a port with an IP address, serving as an identification of sender or recipient.
stack
The software code that implements the protocol being used. In the case of the NOE modules it is
TCP/IP.
STP
Shielded Twisted Pair. A type of cabling consisting of several strands of wire surrounded by foil
shielding, twisted together.
subnet
A physical or logical network within an IP network that shares a network address with other portions
of the network.
subnet mask
A bit mask used to identify or determine which bits in an IP address correspond to the network
address and which bits correspond to the subnet portions of the address. The subnet mask is the
network address plus the bits reserved for identifying the subnetwork.
396 33002479 10/2019

Glossary
switch
A network device that connects two or more separate network segments and allows traffic to be
passed between them. A switch determines whether a frame should be blocked or transmitted
based on its destination address.
T
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP
A protocol suite consisting of the Transmission Control Protocol and the Internet Protocol; the suite
of communications protocols on which the Internet is based.
Transparent Factory
Transparent Factory is a Schneider Electric initiative to bring Internet technologies to the factory
floor to "information enable" Schneider Products to provide easy "transparent" access to plant
operational data over open networks with open tools. Interfacing with products from other
manufacturers for similar access, customers can expect improved methods for monitoring and
controlling factory processes at reduced costs.
Transparent Ready
A Schneider Electric product line based on universal Ethernet TCP/IP and Web technologies.
These industrial automation products (Trademark Telemecanique) and electrical distribution
products (TrademarkMerlin Gerin) can be integrated into real-time data sharing systems with no
need for interfaces. The product line includes Sensor and preactuator type field products (simple
or intelligent), controllers and PLCs, HMI applications, and dedicated gateways and servers.
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A protocol that transmits data over IP.
Uni-Te
Télémecanique unified application protocol (used in S7, Premium, and Micro PLC ranges).
URL
Uniform Resource Locator. The network address of a file.
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair. A type of cabling consisting of insulated cable strands that are twisted
together in pairs.
33002479 10/2019 397

Glossary
W
Web
Worldwide interconnection of stations based on Internet protocols. The most famous one is HTTP
(Web server).
WWW
World Wide Web. A hypertext-based, distributed information system in which clients and servers
are freely available.
398 33002479 10/2019

Index
33002479 10/2019
Index
0-9 configuring Ethernet devices, 93

140NOE77100, 51
10/100BASE-T
140NOE77101, 51
cable distances, 55
140NOE77110, 51
100BASE-FX
140NOE77111, 51
cable distances, 55
Control Expert
10BASE-T
Advantys, 224
cable options, 54
DTM container, 224
hubs, 54
CREAD_REG, 121
140 NOE 771 01
customer support, 70
configure I/O scanning, 378
CWRITE_REG, 124
140CPU65150, 20
140CPU65160, 20
140CPU651x0 D
scan difference from 140NOE77101, 200
data transfer communication blocks
140NOE771•• to 140NOC771•• transfer
IEC, 120
I/O scanning, 207, 381
diagnosing Hot Standby, 30
140NOE77100, 41
Diagnostics web page
140NOE77101, 41
Quantum, 287
scan difference from 140CPU651x0, 200
DTM container, 224
140NOE77110, 41
duplicate IP tests, 333
140NOE77111, 41
140NWM10000, 41
E
A electronic mail notification, 85, 275
embedded web pages, 88, 283
address server, 76, 237
Advantys, 231
agency approvals, 356
F
FactoryCast, 90
B FDR, 237
flash file system, 90
bandwidth monitoring, 86
FTP, 87
FTP servers, 339
C FTP/TFTP services
enable/disable, 182
change modbus plus address
operation 17, 179
communication blocks, 119 G
global data, 83, 185, 339
33002479 10/2019 399

Index
H MIB, 78, 247

Modbus messaging, 79
hot standby, 90, 325
modes, 332
Hot Standby
diagnosing, 30
hot standby network effects, 337 N
HTTP services
NTP time synchronization, 84, 263
enable/disable, 182
I O
operating modes, 332
I/O scanner, 81, 199
configure quantum, 204
I/O scanning, 338
140CPU651x0 and 140NOE77101 scan
P
differences, 200 PRA
140NOE771•• to 140NOC771•• transfer, Control Expert, 224
207, 381 Properties web page
configure140 NOE 771 01, 378 Quantum, 322
multiple lines, 212
installing Ethernet devices
140NOE77100, 51
Q
140NOE77101, 51 Quantum
140NOE77110, 51 140CPU651x0 and 140NOE77101 scan
140NOE77111, 51 differences, 200
IP addresses, 326 Diagnostics web page, 287
Properties web page, 322
K
key switches, 31
R
keypads, 27 READ_REG, 127
remote clients, 337
restriction, 330
L
local clients, 337
S
scanning
M 140CPU651x0 and 140NOE77101 differ-
maintaining Ethernet modules, 343 ences, 200
managed variables, 231
MBAP, 357
MBP_MSTR, 135
change modbus plus address, 179
menus
high-end CPUs, 30
400 33002479 10/2019

Index
services
140CPU65150, 73
140CPU65160, 73
140NOE77100, 44, 73
140NOE77101, 44, 73
140NOE77110, 44, 73
140NOE77111, 44, 73
140NWM10000, 44, 73
address server, 76, 237
bandwidth monitoring, 86
embedded web pages, 88, 283
FDR, 237
FTP, 87
global data, 83, 185
I/O scanner, 81, 199
Modbus messaging, 79
NTP time synchronization, 84, 263
SMTP electronic mail notification, 85, 275
SNMP, 78, 247
SMTP electronic mail notification, 85, 275
SNMP, 78, 247
specifications
Ethernet modules, 355
T
TCP_IP_ADDR, 133
TFTP servers, 339
time synchronization, 84, 263
transferring data
communication blocks, 119
W
web pages
embedded, 88, 283
WRITE_REG, 130
33002479 10/2019 401

Index
402 33002479 10/2019

Quantum Using Ecostruxure™ Control Expert: Ethernet Network Modules User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Quantum Using Ecostruxure™ Control Expert: Ethernet Network Modules User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert

BEFORE YOU BEGIN

START-UP AND TEST

Model Number Module Type

The Name ... Refers to the ...

Title of Documentation Reference Number

Modicon Quantum with Control Expert Ethernet Products

What Is in This Part?

What Is in This Chapter?

Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0

What Is in This Section?

140 CPU 651 x0 Product Overview

Service 140 CPU 651 x0

Physical Presentation and Mounting of Standard High End Modules

1 model number, module description, color code

1 Hang the module.

CPU Controls and Displays

The key positions are shown in the table below:

Key Position PLC Operation

Key Switch Description Tables

Operation Switch Position

Operation Switch Position

Operation Switch Position

Stop/Run/Init commands from Control Allowed(1) Forbidden

Adjusting the Contrast

2 To adjust the contrast darker press:

3 To adjust the contrast lighter press:

4 To confirm the setting press:

Using the Keys

To confirm a selection or an entry

To set a field on the display into the modify mode

LED: on Key active:

1 LCD Display (lens cover closed)

STS Controlled by the Coprocessor software Controlled by the Coprocessor firmware

Using the CPU LCD Display Screens

Structure: LCD display menus and submenus:

Accessing the Screens

2 To step down to a lower menu, operate one of the following keys:

3 To return to the previous menu, press:

140 CPU 65• •• Default Screen

The default screen displays the following information:

Field Display Description

Field Display Description

Port USB Indicates that the port has activity.

PLC Operations Menu

Submenu for PLC Operations: Start, Stop and Init:

Start, Stop, Init Fields Available Description

Submenu for PLC Operations Hot Standby CPU:

Screen Field Option Description

Screen Field Option Description

Submenu for TCP/IP Ethernet PLC Communications submenus:

TCP/IP Ethernet Screen Fields Available Options Available Description

Fields Available Options Available Description

Serial PLC Communications submenus:

Fields Available* Options Available Description

System Info Menu

System Info, PLC Communications submenus:

System Info Screen Fields Available* Option Available Description

LCD Settings Menu

LCD Contrast settings submenu:

LCD Screen Contrast Fields Available Description

LCD Light setting submenus:

Screen Displays Fields Available Description